JP7313993B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player and that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine capable of setting a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for a player, there is a game machine that displays a setting suggesting effect in which a character such as a giraffe, an elephant, a lion, etc. suggesting a set set value is displayed when the change occurs (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902

However, in Patent Literature 1, effects other than setting suggestive effects are not taken into consideration, and there is a problem that the setting suggestive effects may not sufficiently improve the game interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state;
a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed;
with
The suggestive effect includes a first suggestive effect, a second suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect, and a third suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect,
The preparation effect includes a first preparation effect for notifying that the first suggestive effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed,
The third suggestive effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel in the same period and independently of each other,
The third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed,
The preparation effect executing means can execute the second preparation effect over a plurality of variable displays.
It is characterized by
The game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player, and that can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player,
a display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an image display device 5);
A notice effect of displaying on the display means a specific image (for example, the image 245SG005s of the character A, the image 245SG005t of the character B, the image 245SG005u of the character C, and the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C) suggesting the control to the advantageous state; 45SG005G) on the display means and effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display);
with
When the advance notice effect and the setting suggesting effect are executed in parallel, the specific image and the setting suggesting image are displayed in different display areas (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49 as modification 245SG-8, when reel image 245SG005G and group image 245SG005v of characters A to C are simultaneously displayed on image display device 5, reel image 245SG005G is displayed in the lower right portion of image display device 5, and character The part where the collective image 245SG005v of A to C is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5),
The display means is capable of displaying game progress information display (for example, the fourth symbol 245SG005F and the error notification image 245SG005J) corresponding to the progress of the game,
When the game progress information display and the setting suggestion image are displayed simultaneously on the display means, the game progress information display is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the setting suggestion image (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that is displayed with priority over G005G),
moreover,
a suggesting effect execution means capable of executing an advantageous suggesting effect (for example, a pending display forewarning effect, a timer effect, a chance forewarning effect, etc.) suggesting the control to be in the advantageous state;
a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a reservation display advance notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the advantageous suggesting effect will be executed before the advantageous suggesting effect is executed,
The advantageous suggesting effect includes a first suggesting effect (e.g., a pending display forewarning effect), a second suggesting effect (e.g., a timer effect) different from the first suggesting effect, and a third suggesting effect (e.g., a chance forewarning effect) different from the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect. The third suggestive effect, the first preparatory effect, and the second preparatory effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 10-11 (A1) and (A2)), and the third suggestive effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is being executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is being executed (see, for example, FIG. 10-10).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display in specific display areas of the display means (for example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R),
When the setting suggesting image is displayed in the specific display area, the setting suggesting image is displayed with higher visibility than the variable display image variably displayed in the specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-39B, when the reel image 245SG005G is displayed overlapping the symbol display area 5C in the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5C).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the setting suggesting image in the specific display area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The display means has an effect-related image display area (for example, a first pending memory display area 245SG005D and a second pending memory display area 245SG005U) capable of displaying at least a performance-related image (for example, a pending display) related to a performance different from the advance notice effect and the set suggestion effect,
When the setting suggestive images are displayed in the effect-related image display area overlappingly, the setting suggestive image is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the effect-related image displayed in the effect-related image display area (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that is displayed with priority over G005D)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the setting suggesting image in the effect-related image display area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The effect executing means can display, as the specific images, a first specific image (for example, an image 245SG005s of character A indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is low) and a second specific image (for example, a group image 245SG005v of characters A to C indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high) on the display means,
When the first specific image and the setting suggesting image are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the setting suggesting image is displayed with higher visibility than the first specific image. The part that is displayed with priority over s),
When the second specific image and the setting suggesting image are displayed on the display means at the same time, the second specific image and the setting suggesting image are displayed in different display areas (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the collective image 245SG005v of the characters A to C is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the setting suggesting image can be ensured, and when the second specific image is displayed, the second specific image can also be visually recognized, so that the amusement of the game can be improved by the performance of both the advance notice performance and the setting suggesting performance.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The effect executing means can display a special setting suggesting image corresponding to the control of the advantageous state on the display means in the setting suggesting effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37(E), a portion in which a "7" symbol indicating that the variable display result is a big hit in the reel effect can be stopped and displayed).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the attention to the setting suggesting effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to means 5,
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
The effect executing means can display, as the special setting suggesting image, a special setting suggesting image corresponding to the second advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot B or jackpot C) on the display means. A part that can be stopped and displayed, and if the variable display result is a big win and the big win type is a big win B or a big win C, black "7" symbols can be stopped and displayed as a reel effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further increase the attention to the setting suggesting effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
The effect executing means is capable of displaying a non-suggestive image (for example, a "bell" pattern) that does not serve as the setting suggestion, and as the setting suggesting image, a first setting suggesting image (for example, a "watermelon" pattern) and a second setting suggesting image (for example, a "cherry" pattern) that suggests that a setting value more advantageous to the player than the first setting suggesting image is set.
According to this feature, since it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of image displayed in the setting suggesting effect, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
The production executing means is
As the advance notice effect, a effect in which the specific image is in a predetermined action state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-52(C) as modification 245SG-11, a group effect in which a plurality of characters cross the display area of the image display device 5 from right to left) can be executed,
The setting suggesting image can be superimposed and displayed on the specific image in the predetermined operating state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-52(C) as modification 245SG-11, the portion where the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the group effect in the image display device 5).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the setting suggestion image from deteriorating due to the specific image being in a predetermined operating state.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8,
Equipped with motion detection means (for example, stick controller 31A and push button 31B) capable of detecting a predetermined motion of the player,
The production executing means is
An action-promoting notification effect prompting execution of the predetermined action (for example, a portion that displays an operation-promoting image 245SG005H on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-38(B)) can be executed,
As the notice effect, the specific image can be displayed on the basis of the detection of the predetermined action by the action detection means, accompanied by the execution of the action promotion notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-38, the notice effect is an image 245SG005s of the character A, an image 245SG005t of the character B, and an image 245SG005t of the character B when the player operates the push button 31B after the operation promotion image 245SG005H is displayed on the image display device 5. image 245SG005u, the part where any of the group image 245SG005v of characters A to C is displayed),
As the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion image can be displayed based on the detection of the predetermined action by the action detection means without execution of the action promotion notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37, the reel effect is such that the operation prompt image 245SG005H is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the player operates the stick controller 31A to change the reel image 245SG005G to "cherry", "watermelon", "7", " The part where one of the patterns of "Gekiatsu", "Chance", and "Bell" is displayed stopped)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the setting suggesting performance in which the suggestion by the setting suggesting image is performed is not accompanied by the action promotion notification performance, so that the setting suggesting performance is not executed for the player who is not interested in the setting suggesting, while the setting suggesting performance can be executed for the player who is interested in the setting suggesting, so that the performance matching the taste of the player can be executed.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions related to gaming machines of means 10 to 14 below. Conventionally, in a game machine, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-131277, there has been a suggesting performance suggesting control to be in an advantageous state and a preparatory performance notifying that the suggesting performance will be executed before the suggesting performance is executed. However, in such a game machine, there is a possibility that the interest is lowered by executing another performance during the execution of the performance that raises the degree of expectation.

The game machine of means 10 is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and is provided with a suggestion performance executing means capable of executing an advantageous suggesting performance (for example, a holding display notice performance, a timer performance, a chance notice performance, etc.) suggesting control to the advantageous state, and a preparation performance executing means capable of executing a preparatory performance (for example, a hold display notice preparation performance, a timer preparation performance, etc.) for notifying that the advantageous suggestion performance will be executed before the advantageous suggestion performance is executed. The effects include a first suggesting effect (for example, a pending display forewarning effect), a second suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect), and a third suggesting effect (for example, a chance forewarning effect) different from the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect. , the third suggestive effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 10-11 (A1) and (A2)), and the third suggestive effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is being executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is being executed (for example, see FIG. 10-10).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

The gaming machine of means 11 is the gaming machine according to means 10,
The first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are executed in different periods (for example, the timer preparation effect is executed after the execution of the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is completed. See FIG. 10-7 (D)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

The gaming machine of means 12 is the gaming machine according to means 10 or 11,
The first suggestive effect is executed in one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, first effect mode (blue), second effect mode (green), third effect mode (red), etc.; see FIG. 10-3(A)), and the first preparation effect is executed in one of a plurality of types of effect modes (e.g., first effect mode (small effect), second effect mode (large effect, etc.; see FIG. 10-3(B)), and depending on which effect mode the first preparation effect is to be executed. (For example, when the holding display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the holding display advance notice effect is executed by one of the first to third effect modes, and when the holding display advance notice preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed, the holding display notice effect is executed by one of the second to third effect modes).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

The gaming machine of means 13 is the gaming machine according to means 10 to 12,
The advantageous suggesting effect can be executed without executing the corresponding preparation effect (for example, when it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect or the timer effect, it may be determined that the reservation display notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is not executed. See FIGS. 10-3 (B) and 10-4 (B)). It is easy to decide to execute the pending display advance notice preparation effect.In addition, as shown in Fig. 10-4, it is easy to decide to execute the timer effect.However, it may be decided not to execute the timer preparation effect.Then, when the pending display advance notice preparation effect not corresponding to the timer effect is executed, the timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is not executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

The gaming machine of means 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 10 to 13,
Depending on whether or not the preparation effect is executed, the ratio of which effect suggestive effect is executed differs (for example, when the effect mode of the pending display notice effect and the timer preparation effect is determined as the second effect mode, the ratio of deciding to execute the reservation display notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect is higher than when the first effect mode is determined. See FIGS. 10-3 (B) and 10-4 (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as other matters specifying the invention.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the first special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big-hit variation pattern determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a small-hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing reel effect determination processing; FIG. (A) to (F) are explanatory diagrams showing determination ratios of each effect result of the reel effect. 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a cut-in effect pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing execution determination ratios in pattern CI-3 of the cut-in effect; 9 is a flow chart showing an advance notice effect determination process; They are an explanatory diagram showing an execution ratio of the advance notice effect and a determination ratio of the effect pattern, and an explanatory diagram of the effect pattern of the advance notice effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a button operation accepting period, a reel effect executable period, and a notice effect executable period for each variation pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a button operation accepting period, a reel effect executable period, and a notice effect executable period for each variation pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a button operation accepting period, a reel effect executable period, and a notice effect executable period for each variation pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a button operation accepting period, a reel effect executable period, and a notice effect executable period for each variation pattern; It is explanatory drawing of each production|presentation which can be performed during variable display. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram relating to drawing layers of effect images; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a reel effect during variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect mode of a cut-in effect executed when no reel effect is executed; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the cut-in production|presentation performed at the time of reel production|presentation execution. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect during variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a notification mode of a variable display result for each variation pattern; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 245SG-1; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 245SG-2; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of cut-in effects and the determination ratio of effect patterns in modification 245SG-3; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing execution determination ratios of the announcement effect and effect pattern determination ratios in Modified Example 245SG-4; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 245SG-5; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 245SG-6; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a set value suggesting effect executable period and a set value suggesting effect execution determination ratio in modification 245SG-7. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an effect mode of a cut-in effect that is executed when a reel effect is executed in modification 245SG-8; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an effect mode of a cut-in effect that is executed when a reel effect is executed in modification 245SG-9; It is a diagram showing the flow of the variable display of the big hit executed during execution of the reel effect in the modified example 245SG-10. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an effect mode of the advance notice effect executed when the reel effect is executed in the modified example 245SG-11; It is an explanatory diagram of a button operation acceptance period, a reel effect executable period, and a notice effect executable period in the case of normal reach or super reach in modification 245SG-12. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of selection of the effect mode in the modification 245SG-13. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a mode of cut-in effect suggesting a set value in modification 245SG-14; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory view showing a small win variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading notice setting processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of a display pattern of a pre-reading advance notice effect; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a determination ratio of performances to be executed as suggestive performance during rear variable display, and (B) is a diagram showing performance patterns of big win suggestive performance and setting suggestive performance to be executed as suggestive performance during rear variable display. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of a big hit suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of setting suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during front variable display; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display when execution of the big hit suggesting effect is determined, (B) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display when the execution of the setting suggestive effect is determined, (C) is a diagram showing the effect pattern of the character effect and the timer effect to be executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and (D) is the degree of expectation for the big hit and the degree of expectation to execute the set suggestive effect. It is a figure which shows. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and (C) is a view showing the contents of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution period in variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing execution determination ratios and execution expectations of setting suggestion effects as suggestive effects during front variable display of character effects and timer effects in a modification; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of a pending memory display and effect images in a modified example; It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion production|presentation by the variable display of normal reach in a modification, non-shortening non-reach, and shortening non-reach. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pending display advance notice effect determination table and a pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer effect determination table and a timer advance notice preparation effect determination table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance eye announcement effect determination table; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice execution processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of execution timings of a pending display notice effect (preparation effect) and a timer effect (preparation effect); FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect modes of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect; It is a flow chart which shows an example of a chance notice setting process. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance prediction execution propriety determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect modes of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the chance eye advance notice effect;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided for variable display (also referred to as a special symbol game) of special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a variable display of decoration patterns (designs showing numbers etc.) as a plurality of kinds of decoration identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolled display or updated display) in the respective ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right'' decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

A first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first suspension display 25A displays the number of first suspension storage according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second suspension display 25B displays the number of second storage storage according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces come close to the winning ball device 6A, and a closed state in which game balls do not enter the second start-up winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being in an open state) by tilting the movable wing when the solenoid 81 is on. When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and forms a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball cannot enter (pass through) the big winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening so that the game balls can easily enter the big winning opening.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, a hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided for holding (storing) game balls paid out as prize balls or game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine so as to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed), the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or during the period when it is controlled to the big winning game state or the small winning game state described later (when the starting winning occurs but the special game based on the starting winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In a special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a big win pattern, for example, '7', the actual pattern differs depending on the type of big win to be described later) is stop-displayed as a fixed special pattern, it becomes a 'big win', and if a predetermined special pattern (small-win pattern, for example, '2') different from the big win pattern is stop-displayed, it becomes a 'small win'. Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "lost".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc., to be described later) are prepared, and jackpot types are set according to these. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the big winning opening is opened in the same opening mode as the big winning game state in the case of some big winning types (the number of opening times of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds and the closing timing of the big winning opening is the same, etc.). In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time saving state, control (high open control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening by shortening the average normal pattern fluctuation time (period of changing the normal pattern) than in the normal state, or improving the probability of becoming a "normal pattern hit" in the normal game than in the normal state. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc. The pachinko machine 1 is in the initial setting state of the pachinko machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be "normal game" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be "big win" (For example, when the system is reset and the predetermined return processing is not executed after the power is turned on). is controlled in the same way as

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, when the special picture game at the occurrence of "small win" is the special picture game of the above-mentioned predetermined number of cuts, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, it may be performed by outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or turning on/off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, and the like.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, variable display of decorative patterns is started corresponding to the start of the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game in ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right'' decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided in the image display device 5.例文帳に追加At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game and the second special game, the fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means a mode in which, when the decorative patterns stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative patterns which are not yet stopped and displayed continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko game machine 1, a plurality of kinds of ready-to-win performances are executed with different ratios (also called big win reliability or big win expectation) of a display result (display result of a special game or display result of variable display of decorative patterns) to a ``big win'' according to a performance mode. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special pattern game becomes a ``big hit'', a fixed decoration pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns is a ``big hit''). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

In the case of a ``variable probability big win'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd number decoration patterns (for example, ``7'' etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and in the case of a ``non-probability variable big win (normal big win)'' not controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, even number decoration patterns (for example, ``6'' etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special pattern game is a ``small hit'', a fixed decoration pattern (for example, ``1 3 5'' or the like) which is a predetermined small hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern is a ``small hit''). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of a part of the big win types (big hit type of the big win game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win", a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "lost", the mode of variable display of the decorative patterns does not become the ready-to-win mode, and as a display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, fixed decorative patterns (also called "non-ready-to-win") of the non-ready-to-win combination may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns to be "non-ready-to-lose"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of the decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, as the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined ready-to-win combination (also referred to as "lost reach"), which is not a big win combination, may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is "lost reach").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decoration pattern during the variable display of the decoration pattern and then resuming the variable display, a pseudo-continuous performance may be executed in which one variable display is simulated as a plurality of times of variable display.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. By executing a common performance during the small winning game state and the big winning game state in a part of the big winning type (the big winning type of the big winning game state in the same manner as the small winning game state, for example, the big winning type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state), the player may not know whether the current state is the small winning game state or the big winning game state. In such a case, it may be made impossible to distinguish between the high-probability state and the low-probability state by executing a common performance after the end of the small-win game state and after the end of the big-win game state.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a normal game (including management of suspension), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

A game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

I / O 105, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation display device 25A, second reservation display device 25B, signal for controlling (driving) general design reservation display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 takes in a detection signal (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits the signal to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) to the effect control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control commands include, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the big winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of reserved memories, the game state), the command specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and has a function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances corresponding to the progress of the game, including various reports such as driving of the movable body 32, error reporting, and power failure recovery reporting) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, including determination of the effect to be executed, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the effect based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicates the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting/lighting-off mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating movable body 32, etc.) may be executed by effect control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

An I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in a performance control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backup data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is recovered, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before the restoration by executing timer interrupt processing for game control to be described later.

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, a performance control command designating the backed-up game state before power interruption, or a performance control command designating the display result of the special game being executed when the special game is being executed may be transmitted. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the performance control command specifying the restoration time from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the power interruption has been restored or is being restored from the power interruption. The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start-up winnings, etc.), and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has occurred) are output to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and the small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details will be described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). A CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby enabling management of execution and suspension of a normal pattern game based on a detection signal from a gate switch 21 (based on the passage of a game ball through a passage gate 41) and control of opening of a variable winning ball device 6B based on ``per normal pattern''. The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission setting for transmitting a performance control command for designating determination results such as occurrence of start winning, number of pending memories, pre-reading determination, etc. is performed to a performance control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command at the time of start winning thus transmitted and set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG.

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In the special pattern normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a ``big win'' or a ``minor win'' and the type of the big win in the case of ``big win'' are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed, based on the random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the production contents (type of reach production, etc.) during the variable display of the decorative pattern. It is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes processing of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, processing of measuring elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary, and the like. Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop processing includes a setting process for stopping the variation of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for stopping and displaying (deriving) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big win opening pre-processing includes a setting process for starting the execution of the round in the big win game state and opening the big winning port based on the fact that the display result is "big win". When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". The process during the opening of the big win includes a process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning hole and a process of judging whether or not it is time to return the big winning hole from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.例文帳に追加Then, when returning the big prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning prize opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the processing during the opening of the big winning prize is finished.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The processing after opening the big win includes processing for determining whether or not the number of execution times of rounds in which the big prize opening is opened reaches a set upper limit execution number, and processing for setting to end the big win game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. When the number of execution times of the round does not reach the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of execution times of the round reaches the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the special process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes processing for waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending performance is executed as a performance operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state passes, and processing for performing various settings for starting variable probability control and time reduction control corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This processing during the opening of the small winning prize includes processing for measuring the elapsed time after opening the big prize winning port and processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the big prize winning port from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time or the like. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and performs register settings of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the production control board 12. Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the turning on of the performance control INT signal, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command) when using a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt prohibition state. The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various performance control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the performance control command reception buffer, setting and control corresponding to the read performance control commands are performed. For example, the read performance control command is stored in a predetermined area of a RAM 122 or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which performance control command is received and the contents specified by the performance control command can be confirmed by performance control process processing or the like. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative luminous bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving operation of the movable body 32 are controlled to operate various effect devices. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11.例文帳に追加When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result (determined decorative pattern) of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the presence/absence of execution of various effects such as ready-to-win effects and various advance notice effects, the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output the sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and to output the command (electrical signal) to the lamp control board 14 for the game effect lamp 9 and decoration. Various production controls are executed during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking LEDs. After performing such performance control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative pattern is read out from the performance control pattern, or when a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11, etc., the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . When receiving a performance control command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, if the command designates the start of the big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it determines that the display result in the special figure game is ``missing'', and updates the value of the performance process flag to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit middle production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, an production control pattern corresponding to the production contents in the small-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the small-hit game state based on the set contents. In the small winning middle performance processing, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small winning game state from the main board 11, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5" corresponding to the small winning ending performance, and the small winning middle performance processing is finished.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small-hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small-hit game state, etc., and executes various effect control at the end of the small-hit game state based on the set contents. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In the big-win performance processing, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7" corresponding to the ending performance processing in response to receiving, for example, a command designating the end of the big-win game state from the main board 11, and the big-win performance processing is completed.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, for example, and executes various performance control of the ending performance at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 in the above basic description is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but it may be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winning.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a slot machine (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided in a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1, and may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game may be executed not only by loading a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) may include that one is a ratio of “0%”. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".
(Description of Characteristic Portion 245SG)

Next, the game machine in the characterizing part 245SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-41.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 245SG001a formed in the shape of a vertically elongated rectangular frame, a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface, and a game machine frame (underframe) 245SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. In the game machine frame 245SG003, a glass door frame 245SG003a having a glass window is provided so as to be rotatable about the left side between a door open position where the front surface of the game machine frame 245SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front surface is closed. It is designed to be able to see through the skill area.

The game machine frame 245SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it.

The left game area 245SG002L is a game area where a game ball hit relatively weakly (left-handed) by operating the batted ball operation handle 30 flows down. It is a game area that flows down through 2C.

In addition, the left game area 245SG002L is provided with a general prize winning port 10, and the right game area 245SG002R is provided with a passing gate 41, a variable prize winning ball device 6B, a general prize winning port 10, and a special variable prize winning ball device 7 from upstream to downstream of the right game region 245SG002R. In other words, a game ball flowing down the left gaming area 245SG002L can enter the first start winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and a game ball flowing down the right gaming area 245SG002R can enter the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing gate 4. 1 can be passed.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 245SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, a game ball flowing down the left game area 245SG002L cannot enter the second start winning opening or the big winning opening, and a game ball flowing down the right game area 245SG002R cannot enter the first start winning opening.

A first reserved memory display area 245SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 245SG005U are displayed on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . In the first reserved memory display area 245SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 245SG005U, a reserved memory display (reserved display) for identifiably displaying a variable display reserved memory number (special figure reserved memory number) corresponding to the special figure game is performed. A fourth pattern 245SG005F is displayed at the right end of the reserved display area of the image display device 5 . The fourth symbol 245SG005F is a symbol blinking during execution of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in order to make the player recognize that the variable display is being performed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main board 11 in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment is housed in a board case 245SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. In addition, the main board 11 is provided with a lock switch 245SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, a setting changeover switch 245SG052 functioning as a setting switch for changing setting values such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the setting value change state, and an open sensor 245SG090 for detecting opening of the game machine frame 245SG003. Incidentally, the setting value change state in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment is also a state in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by a store clerk or the like (setting value confirmation state).

A setting switching main body provided with an operating portion such as the lock switch 245SG051 and the setting changeover switch 245SG052 that can be operated by the player is accommodated in the board case 245SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 245SG051 and the setting changeover switch 245SG052 are formed on the back surface of the board case 245SG201 so that they can be operated without opening the board case 245SG201. It is exposed on the rear side through an opening.

Since the board case 245SG201 having the lock switch 245SG051 and the setting changeover switch 245SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 245SG003 is closed. Further, since the lock switch 245SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 245SG051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later, by means of a setting key. In the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 245SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 245SG201. The display monitor 245SG029 is connected to the main substrate 11 and arranged above the substrate case 245SG201. That is, the display monitor 245SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 245SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 245SG003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame 245SG003 opened, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 245SG, if the lock switch 245SG051 and the open sensor 245SG09 are ON when the power is turned on, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 245SG029 as the set value change state. At this time, by operating the setting switch 245SG052, the numerical value (set value) displayed on the display monitor 245SG029 can be updated and displayed.

By turning off the lock switch 245SG051 while any number from 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 245SG029, the number displayed on the display monitor 245SG029 is set as a new set value. When the pachinko game machine 1 is activated, the CPU 103 sends a set value designation command to the effect control board 12, regardless of whether a new set value is set (set). By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 from the setting value specifying command.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, a first special symbol display device 245SG004A capable of executing a variable display of the first special symbol, a second special symbol display device 245SG004B capable of executing a variable display of the second special symbol, and a first reservation capable of displaying the number of first reserved memories. Display device 245SG025A, second reservation display device 245SG025B capable of displaying the number of second reservation memory, normal design display device 245SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display device 245SG025C capable of displaying the number of normal design reservation memory, round display device 245SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, high base state (time reduction) A game information display unit 245SG200 is provided in which a right hitting lamp 245SG132 that lights up in a game state in which a game ball is hit toward the right game area 245SG002R, such as a state) or a jackpot game state, a probability variable lamp 245SG133 that lights in a probability variable state, and a time reduction lamp 245SG134 that lights in a high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 245SG004A and the second special symbol display device 245SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. Also, in the first special symbol display device 245SG004A and the second special symbol display device 245SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination.

In the variable display of the first special symbol, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the first special symbol display device 245SG004A can display the variable display result and derivation display with two kinds of big win symbols (combinations of lit LEDs) for each big win type. In addition, when the variable display result becomes a big win in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 245SG004B can derive and display the variable display result with two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 245SG004A and the second special symbol display device 245SG004B, but the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 245SG004A and the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 245SG004B overlap at least a part. You may have

Each of the first suspension display 245SG025A and the second suspension display 245SG025B has four segments of LEDs arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. In the first suspension display 245SG025A and the second suspension display 245SG025B, if the number of suspension memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up, and as the number of suspension memories increases, the second LED from the left, the third from the left, and the fourth LED from the left sequentially light up. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED in the reserve display corresponding to the variable display decreases (is consumed) and goes out in a predetermined shift direction (toward the left in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment).

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure reservation memory is preferentially executed. For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 245SG025A is lit, and the two left LEDs of the second pending indicator 245SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by the execution of the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, it is variable based on the first special figure pending memory. display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 245SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, display control commands used to control image display operations in the image display device 5, audio control commands used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and LED control commands used to control lighting operations of the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs.

Note that the effect control board 12 in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 245SG321 and a second movable body 245SG322 that can move between their respective origin positions and effect positions during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 245SG332 capable of detecting that the SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 245SG322 is connected.

FIG. 8-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 245SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 245SG004A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 245SG004B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a decorative pattern variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), different EXT data is set according to the determination result (predetermined result) as to whether the variable display result is "loss", "big hit", or "small hit", or according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the second game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state) in which time reduction control is performed.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to specify which error (abnormality) has occurred on the performance control board 12 side, and the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing to be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. In the notification command during the opening of the large winning opening and the notification command after opening the large winning opening, different EXT data are set corresponding to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

Command B100H is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 245SG004A is established based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the start winning (first starting winning) being generated. Command B200H is a second starting winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 245SG004B is established based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) being generated.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is established, for example. The second reserved storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second starting opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is established, for example. Also, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command may be transmitted corresponding to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is established (when the number of reserved memories is reduced).

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probable variation, non-probability variation, and sudden probability) as a result of determination at the time of winning. Also, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "others" as a result of determination at the time of winning.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 for providing a work area for game control, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 for executing control operations by executing the game control program, and a random number circuit 10 for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the CPU 103. 4, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in a variable data write operation. 5, a transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 is also performed.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the characteristic part 245SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, the random number MR2 for jackpot type judgment, the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment, the random number MR4 for normal figure display result judgment, and the random number MR5 for initial value determination of MR4. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, each random number value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value within the range shown in FIG. 8-5, but the present invention is not limited to this.

FIG. 8-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for each of the cases in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is 'non-reach' and 'reach' among the cases where the variable display result is 'loss', and also for the case where the variable display result is 'big win'. In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which normal reach performance is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which super reach performance such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ and super reach δ are executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, . . . may be provided as in super reach. Moreover, even in the super reach fluctuation pattern, five or more super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ is executed in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, the special figure variation pattern is set long in the order of super reach δ, super reach γ, super reach β, and super reach α.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes higher in the order of "big hit". Therefore, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, the longer the variation time, the higher the degree of expectation for a big win.

However, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, as the variation pattern of the super reach γ, there is provided a variation pattern (PB1-5 shown in FIG. 8-6) for executing a resurrection effect to notify that the variable display result is a big hit after once notifying that the variable display result is a loss as the reach effect of the super reach γ. Therefore, the variation pattern of the super reach γ for executing the resurrection performance is set to have a special figure variation time longer than that of the ordinary variation pattern of the super reach γ and shorter than that of the variation pattern of the super reach δ, but exceptionally, it is the variation pattern with the highest degree of expectation for big win (100%).

In the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, the types of these fluctuation patterns, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc., are first determined, and then the variation pattern to be executed is determined from the variation pattern belonging to the determined type. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern. Then, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the variation content (effect content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the same variation pattern is used, the variation content (effect content) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 of losing the normal reach, when the set value is 1, the variation pattern is the loss of the normal reach, when the set value is 2, the variation pattern is the loss of the non-ready reach by executing the pseudo continuous performance twice, and when the set value is 3, the variation pattern is the loss of the super reach by performing the pseudo continuous performance three times, and so on.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, a variation pattern table storing a plurality of variation patterns as variation modes of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10, the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. , Loss fluctuation pattern determination table, normal diagram display result determination table (not shown), normal diagram fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value of 6, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game hall side, and the smaller values in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are more advantageous to the game hall side.

8-7 to 8-10 are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

FIG. 8-7 (A) shows that the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values which are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

FIG. 8-7 (B) is the first special figure to be selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state). It is a display result determination table. In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values which are numerical values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

FIG. 8-7 (C) shows that the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 2, and the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state) or a short time state (low probability high base state). It is a first special figure display result determination table selected when it is. In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values which are numerical values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

FIG. 8-7 (D) is the first special figure to be selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 2 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state). It is a display result determination table. In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values which are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

FIG. 8-7 (E) shows that the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 3, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values which are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

FIG. 8-7 (F) shows that the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 3 and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability high base state). It is a display result determination table for the first special figure. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1429 of the hit determination values, which are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

FIG. 8-8 (A) shows that the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state) or a short time state (low probability high base state). In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss" among the hit determination values which are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination.

FIG. 8-8 (B) is the first special figure to be selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 4 and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state). It is a display result determination table. In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values which are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33049 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

FIG. 8-8 (C) shows that the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 5, and the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state) or a short time state (low probability high base state). In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values which are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

FIG. 8-8 (D) is the first special figure to be selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 5 and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state). It is a display result determination table. In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values which are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

FIG. 8-8 (E) shows that the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 6, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values which are numerical values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

FIG. 8-8 (F) is the first special figure to be selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 6 and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state). It is a display result determination table. In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values which are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

FIG. 8-9 (A) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss" among the hit determination values which are numerical values which can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination.

FIG. 8-9 (B) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state). It is a display result determination table. In the second special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values which are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

FIG. 8-9 (C) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 2, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1253 of the hit determination values, which are numerical values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

FIG. 8-9 (D) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, the second special figure is selected when the setting value is 2 and the gaming state is the variable probability state (high probability high base state). It is a display result determination table. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss" among the hit determination values which are numerical values which can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination.

FIG. 8-9 (E) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 3, and the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state) or a short time state (low probability high base state). It is a second special figure display result determination table selected when it is. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1272 of the hit determination values, which are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

FIG. 8-9 (F) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the second special figure display result determination table is selected when the setting value is 3 and the gaming state is the variable probability state (high probability high base state). In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1429 of the hit determination values, which are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

FIG. 8-10 (A) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 4, and the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state) or a short time state (low probability high base state). It is a second special figure display result determination table selected when it is. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss" among the hit determination values which are numerical values which can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination.

FIG. 8-10 (B) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the setting value is 4 and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability high base state). It is a display result determination table. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss" among hit determination values which are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with random number MR1 for special figure display result determination.

FIG. 8-10 (C) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 5, and the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state) or a short time state (low probability high base state). It is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected when. In the second special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values which are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

FIG. 8-10 (D) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the second special figure display result determination table is selected when the setting value is 5 and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability high base state). In the second special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values which are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

FIG. 8-10 (E) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 6, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). In the second special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values which are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

FIG. 8-10 (F) is the first special figure to be selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 6 and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability high base state). It is a display result determination table. In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values which are numerical values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the game state is the variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state are assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the variable probability state in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is "jackpot" when it is in the normal state or the time saving state is determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state (in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, 1/240 when the set value is 4, set 1/220 when the value is 5 and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the probability that the special figure display result is "jackpot" and controlled to the jackpot game state is higher (in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, 1/160 when the set value is 3, and 1/140 when the set value is 4). 1/120 for a value of 5 and 1/100 for a set value of 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the big win game state so that the probability of determining to control to the big win game state is higher when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in the variable probability state than in the normal state or the time saving state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state differs according to each setting value (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability-variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the jackpot in the probability-variing state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is different. The multiplier of the probability is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short time state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short time state at each set value may be set to be constant (for example, 5 times).

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as the ``small win'' has the same value. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, in the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and the probability of being controlled to the small hit game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or the set value, the determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining the special figure display result as a ``small win'' and controlling it to the small win game state is the same value different from the first special figure display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10, in the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and the probability of being controlled to the small hit game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small hit" regardless of the set value is the same probability, but the present invention is not limited to this. Furthermore, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" according to the variable special figure and is controlled to the small winning game state is exemplified in a different form, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" or "small hit" in each display result determination table, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for the set value 6.

That is, in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot". A number within the range plus the number range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Here, when the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value as described above, while the small hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346). Since it is set to the range of 33094, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big win regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for the set value 6.

That is, in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the variable probability state, if the setting value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot". A number within the added range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 among the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value, as in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674). Since it is set to the range of 33094, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big win regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for the set value 6.

That is, in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot". A number within the range plus the number range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Here, when the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value as described above, while the small hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346). Since it is set within the range of 33421, it is possible to prevent the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which varies according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big win regardless of the setting value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for the set value 6.

That is, in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table of FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the variable probability state, if the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot". A number within that range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 among the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value, as in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674). Since it is set within the range of 33421, it is possible to prevent the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which varies according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range based on the hit judgment value of 1020 is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and regardless of the gaming state and the setting value, the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767. The variable display result is determined by using the value as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, when the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the same). In addition, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the first special figure display result determination table is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is 655, which is about double). 2767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and is controlled to the big win game state is lowest, and the larger the value of the setting value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result is to be controlled to the "jackpot" and to the big win game state. Set value 2>Set value 1).

In other words, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 coincides with any hit determination value corresponding to the big hit, decides that the special symbol is a big win (big win A to big win C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to a big winning game state, but it also means determining whether or not to make the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 245SG004A or the second special symbol display device 245SG004B a big winning symbol. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but it also means determining whether or not the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 245SG004A or the second special symbol display device 245SG004B is to be a small winning symbol.

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, a total of 6 set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-11(A) and 8-11(B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 8-11 (A) is a table for determining the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning hole (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). In addition, FIG. 8-11 (B) is a table for determining the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed).

The big win type determination table is a table referred to for determining the big win type to be one of big wins A to C based on a random number (MR2) for winning type determination when it is determined that a variable display result should be a big win pattern.

Here, the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-12. In the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, a jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state is completed and shifts to a low-probability-high base state, and a jackpot B or a jackpot C (also referred to as a probability-variable jackpot) in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game is completed and shifts to a high-probability high base state are set.

The big win game state by 'big win A' is a normal open big win that is repeatedly executed five rounds (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player, and the big win game state by 'big win B' is a normal open big win that is repeatedly executed by 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state by the "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big win game state by the ``jackpot A'' ends when the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment) or when the big win game state is entered before the special game is executed the predetermined number of times.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the big win generated again is the big win B or the big win C, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called continuous game state.

In the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or less jackpot types or four or more jackpot types may be provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the big hit B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. In other words, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, while the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the winning port into which the game ball has won is the first start prize-winning port or the second start prize-winning port, the jackpot type is determined by a common rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is determined as one of the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a big win variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variable display result "big win", a big win variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variable display result "small hit", and a loss variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variable display result "loss" are prepared in advance.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern for the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern for the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), the variation pattern for the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), the variation pattern for the super reach γ jackpot without executing the resurrection effect (PB1-4), the variation pattern for the super reach γ jackpot with the resurrection effect executed (PB1-5), the variation pattern for the super reach δ jackpot ( PB1-6), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table, in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 50 are assigned to the normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), 51 to 200 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 201 to 400 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern ( PB1-3), 401 to 650 are assigned to super reach γ jackpot variation patterns (PB1-4) in which revival performance is not executed, 651 to 700 are assigned to super reach γ jackpot variation patterns (PB1-5) to execute revival performance, and 701 to 997 are assigned to super reach δ jackpot variation patterns (PB1-6).

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the variation pattern for the big win is determined using one variation pattern determination table. You may make it differ in the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the small-hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of the small-hit variation pattern (PC1-1), out of the possible range of the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns may be provided as small hit variation patterns.

In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss includes a variation pattern determination table for loss A that is used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not implemented, a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4 in the low base state, a variation pattern determination table C for loss that is used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state, and a high base state in which the game state is a time saving control. A variation pattern determination table D for failure, which is used when , is prepared in advance.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss A, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3), the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ loss (PA2-4), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ (PA2-5), the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be taken. A predetermined random value within the range is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss A (for 1 or less total pending storage number in low base), 1 to 450 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to non-reach loss variation patterns (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to normal reach loss variation patterns (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are super reach α. It is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 are assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3), 931 to 970 are assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach γ (PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach δ (PA2-5).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern for shortened non-reach loss (PA1-2) corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4, the fluctuation pattern for normal reach loss (PA2-1), the fluctuation pattern for super reach α loss (PA2-2), the fluctuation pattern for super reach β (PA2-3), the variation pattern for super reach γ loss (PA2-4), and the variation pattern for super reach δ loss (PA2-5). A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for judgment can take is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending memories in low base), 1 to 500 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are super reach. α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 are assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3), 931 to 970 are assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach γ (PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach δ (PA2-5).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of short non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories (PA1-3), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3), the variation pattern of super reach γ loss (PA2-4), and the variation pattern of super reach δ loss (PS2-5). A predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 for pattern determination can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for loss C (for 5 or more total pending memories in low base), 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to non-reach loss variation patterns (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to normal reach loss variation patterns (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are super reach α. It is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 are assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3), 931 to 970 are assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach γ (PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach δ (PA2-5).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of non-reach deviation (PA1-4), the variation pattern of deviation of normal reach (PA2-1), the variation pattern of deviation of super reach α (PA2-2), the variation pattern of deviation of super reach β (PA2-3), the variation pattern of deviation of super reach γ (PA2-4), and the variation pattern of deviation of super reach δ (PA2-5) are random values for variation pattern determination. A predetermined random number within the range that MR3 can take is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (D), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss D (for high base medium), 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2). -2), 851 to 930 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), 931 to 970 are assigned to the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ deviation variation pattern (PA2-5).

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern. Also, when using the deviation pattern determination tables A to D, regardless of the variation pattern determination table, 701 to 850 of the determination values are super reach α deviation variation patterns, 851 to 930 are super reach β deviation variation patterns, 931 to 970 are super reach γ deviation variation patterns, and 971 to 997 are assigned to super reach δ deviation variation patterns. Since the hit variation pattern is determined by a common determination ratio, it is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered due to the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern not being executed.

In the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern for losing super reach α, the variation pattern for losing super reach β, the variation pattern for losing super reach γ, and the variation pattern for losing super reach δ are exemplified in a form in which the respective determination ratios are completely the same among the respective set values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern for losing super reach α, the variation pattern for losing super reach β, and the variation pattern for losing super reach γ. The determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of , and the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ may be different for each set value.

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the variable display result is a loss, the determination ratio of all the variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, or only the determination ratio of any one of the non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

The variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation has a shorter variation time than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the variation pattern (PA1-3) of non-reach deviation has a shorter variation time than the variation pattern (PA1-2) (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories is increased, a non-reach-loose variation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, making it easier to digest the reserved memory, and by starting winning when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit number of 4, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes in which no reserved memory is performed. It is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game due to non-execution of the display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (A) to 8-14 (C), the variation pattern is determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the total retention storage number. When performing variable display, a variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol.

Further, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect and which ready-to-win effect is to be executed for each determined variation pattern are exemplified as one-to-one correspondence.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage part, a second special figure reservation storage part, a normal figure reservation storage part, a game control flag setting part, a game control timer setting part, a game control counter setting part, and a game control buffer setting part.

The first special figure reservation storage part stores the reservation data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 245SG004A) which has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) is generated. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and based on the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. It stores until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage part in this manner indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and serves as the suspension information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a big hit will be achieved based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game.

The second special figure reservation storage part stores the reservation data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 245SG004B) which has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the second start prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start prize (the second start prize) is generated. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and based on the establishment of the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage part in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and serves as the suspension information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game.

The holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the holding information (second holding information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening may be stored in association with the holding number in a common holding storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) may be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number.

The normal pattern reservation storage unit stores the reservation information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 245SG020 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.例文帳に追加For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for general pattern display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting section. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update the game numbers by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random numbers MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may update the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may update the random count value by subjecting all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104 to predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Also, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting portion, a performance control timer setting portion, a performance control counter setting portion, and a performance control buffer setting portion.

The performance control flag setting part is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11. - 特許庁For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting portion, data constituting a reception command buffer at the time of start winning is stored. In the start winning command buffer, a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure being displayed are provided. In addition, in the start winning command buffer, a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special figure reserved memory and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed are provided. When there is a start winning to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, commands such as a starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command) and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 as one set. A storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer at the time of starting prize are associated with these commands, and storage areas (entries) for separately storing the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage are secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted upward one by one as will be described later, when the start condition is established and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started.

A performance control CPU 120 stores a command from the head (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in an empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the reception command buffer at the time of start winning at the time of starting winning to the first start winning opening, and stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning at the time of starting winning to the second start winning opening. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when a command is received, each command is stored in a storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage or the second special figure reservation storage.

Next, processing executed by the CPU 103 in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-15 is a flow chart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, as shown in FIG. 8-15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first starting opening switch 22A is on based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A (245SGS501a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (245SGS501a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, it should be possible to specify the number of the first special figure reservation memory. When the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (245SGS502; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "1" (245SGS503).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 245SGS501a (245SGS501a; N), and when the number of first special figure reserved storage reaches the upper limit at 245SGS502 (245SGS502; Y), based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the second starting port switch 2 2B is on (245SGS501b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (245SGS501b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At 245SGS505, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (245SGS505; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "2" (245SGS506).

In addition, when the second starting port switch is not on (245SGS501b; N) or when the second special figure reservation memory number is the upper limit value (245SGS505; Y), the starting prize determination process is terminated.

After executing either of the processes of 245SGS503 and 245SGS506, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer is updated so as to add 1 (245SGS507). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. Thus, the count value of the number of the first reserve memory is updated so as to be increased by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning hole and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to be increased by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning hole and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (245SGS508). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of 245SGS508, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (245SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (245SGS510). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start opening buffer value is "2", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit.

Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the kind of big hit are used for judging whether or not the result of variable display of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be ``big hit'', and to judge the kind of big hit when the result of variable display is ``big hit''. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 245SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 245SGS510, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (245SGS511). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning designation command to the performance control board 12 is performed by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command to the performance control board 12 is performed by storing the memory address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG.

Following the process of 245SGS511, the winning random number determination process is executed (245SGS512). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (245SGS513). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG.

After executing the process of 245SGS513, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (245SGS514). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (245SGS514; Y), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (245SGS515), and the process proceeds to 245SGS501b. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (245SGS514; N), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (245SGS516), and then the start prize determination process is terminated. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 8-16(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed by the 245SGS 512 of FIG. 8-15 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 245SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, in the special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5), the game state, the special symbol for executing the variable display, and the display result determination table (see FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10) according to the setting value are selected. It is determined whether or not to control to the small hit game state as the judgment and the special figure display result as "small hit".

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random number determination process at the time of winning of 245SGS512, thereby determining whether or not it is determined to stop display the jackpot pattern or small winning pattern as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. . As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning opening, that is, before it is determined whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special symbol display result will be a "big hit" or a "minor hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. Then, a pre-reading notice effect such as a pending display notice effect is executed.

In the random value determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by checking the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 245SG152, for example (245SGS521). The CPU 103 may specify a variable probability state (high-probability-high base state) when the variable-probability flag is on, specify a short-time state (low-probability-high base state) when the variable-probability flag is off and a short-time flag is on, and specify a normal state (low-probability-low base state) when both the variable-probability flag and the short-time flag are off.

Following the processing of 245SGS521, the CPU 103 identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (245SGS522). Next, a display result determination table corresponding to the current game state, start buffer value and setting value is selected and set (245SGS524).

Specifically, when the starting port buffer value is "1", if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Set the first special figure display result determination table shown in 7 (C), set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (D) when the setting value is 2 and the game state is a variable probability state, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. The first special figure display result determination table shown in 7 (F) is set.

In addition, when the starting port buffer value is "1", if the setting value is 4 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Set the first special figure display result determination table shown in C), set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-8 (D) when the set value is 5 and the game state is a variable probability state, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Set the first special figure display result determination table shown in F).

Also, when the starting port buffer value is "2", if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Set the second special figure display result determination table shown in C), set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (D) when the setting value is 2 and the game state is a variable probability state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Set the second special figure display result determination table shown in F).

Also, when the starting port buffer value is "2", if the set value is 4 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Set the second special figure display result determination table shown in 10 (C), set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-10 (D) when the set value is 5 and the game state is a variable probability state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-10 (F).

After setting the display result determination table, the variable display result determination module (245SGS525) performs processing to determine whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "loss". In the variable display result determination module, the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the set variable display result determination table are compared with the value of the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result. If it is out of the numerical range of the big-hit determination value and out of the numerical range of the small-hit determination value, the variable display result may be determined as lost.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is determined at 245SGS525 that the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS526). When it is determined not to be a big hit (245SGS526; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a small hit in 245SGS525 (245SGS527). When it is determined not to be a small hit, that is, when it is determined to be a loss in the variable display (245SGS527; N), the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "loss", is executed (245SGS527a), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current game state is the time saving state (245SGS528).

If the time saving flag is not set (245SGS528; N), select and set the deviation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. Go to 6 (245SGS530).

When it is determined at 245SGS526 that the variable display is a big hit (245SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination random number MR2 and the big hit type determination table (245SGS533). At this time, a CPU 103 selects table data for big hit type determination from table data constituting a big hit type determination table according to a variable special figure (a ``first special figure'' corresponding to ``1'' or a ``second special figure'' corresponding to ``2'') specified corresponding to the start buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

In addition, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the judged jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the jackpot A, the third design designation command in the case of the jackpot B, and the fourth design designation command in the case of the jackpot C is executed (245SGS534), and then, as a table for judging the jackpot variation pattern, the variation pattern determination table for the big win shown in FIG. 8-13 (A) is selected and set (245S). GS535), go to 245SGS536.

Further, when it is determined at 245SGS527 that the variable display results in a small hit (245SGS527; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result becoming a "small hit", is executed (245SGS531), the small hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) is selected and set (245SGS532), and 245SGS Proceed to 536.

In this characteristic portion 245SG, in these variation pattern determination table A to variation pattern determination table D for loss, a determination value of 1 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach and the variation pattern of normal reach in common, and the variation pattern of super reach is assigned to 701 to 997.

Therefore, when the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss, and the determination of non-reach and super reach is always a non-reach or super reach variation pattern even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination.

After executing any of the processes of 245SGS529, 245SGS530, 245SGS532, and 245SGS535, the variation category is determined according to the range of determination values including the random number MR3 using each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern (245SGS536). As shown in FIG. 8-16(B), in the characteristic part 245SG, at least when the variable display result is "lost", a variable category with a variable display mode of "non-reach", a variable category with a variable display mode of "super reach" and a variable category with a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category with a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small win) are provided, and based on the random value MR3, such a variation is performed. It is sufficient if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be a category.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variation category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 245SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (245SGS537), the random value determination processing at the time of winning is ended.

Incidentally, the symbol designation command and the variation category designation command are transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

Next, processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 8-17 is a flow chart showing the effect control main processing in the characterizing portion 245SG. In this characteristic portion 245SG, as shown in FIGS. 8-17, a portion for executing an error notification process (245SGS078) is added to the effect control main process of FIG. 6 explained in the basic explanation.

In the error notification process (245SGS078), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error designation command is received from the main substrate 11, and if the error designation command is received, specifies the error detected by the CPU 103 from the received error designation command. Then, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control to display the error notification image 245SG005J (see FIG. 8-39) corresponding to the identified error on the image display device 5. FIG.

FIG. 8-18 is part of a flow chart showing the effect control process processing in the characterizing section 245SG. In the effect control process processing in the characteristic portion 239SG, after the execution of the pre-reading notice determination processing (step S71), the pending display update processing (245SGSGS072) and the fourth symbol variable display update processing (245SGSGS073) are executed.

In addition, in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 of the characteristic part 245SG, four commands such as a start winning opening designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reservation storage number notification command are set as one set, and a winning reception command buffer having a storage area (entry) for separately storing the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory is provided.

In the pending display update process, the performance control CPU 120 updates the display number of the pending memory in the first pending memory display area 245SG005D based on the number of stored commands "B100 (H)" indicating the first start winning hole as the starting hole winning designating command stored in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 updates the number of reserved memories displayed in the second reserved memory display area 245SG005U based on the number of stored commands of 'B200 (H)' indicating the second starting winning opening as the starting opening winning designation command stored in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning.

Further, in the fourth symbol variable display update process (245SGSGS073), the effect control CPU 120 blinks the fourth symbol 245SG005F when the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display.

8-19 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set (245SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is set (245SGS271; Y), various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning are shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set in 245SGS271 (245SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set (245SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set (245SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display 2 start command reception flag is set (245SGS273; Y), various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer are shifted upward by one buffer number (2 45SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

After executing 245SGS272 or 245SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern specification command from the variation pattern specification command storage area (245SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (245SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In addition, when the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, the received display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit A, for example, a combination of decoration patterns (jackpot design) in which 3 patterns are even-numbered as the stop pattern is determined. When the received display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big win B, for example, a combination of decoration patterns (big win pattern) in which three patterns are arranged in an odd number other than '7' or '3' is determined as a stop pattern. When the received display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the big win C, for example, a combination of decoration patterns (big win pattern) in which three patterns are ``7'' or ``3'' as a stop pattern is determined. Also, when the received display result designation command is the same result designation command of the fifth variable table indicating a small win, for example, a combination of decoration patterns (small win patterns) such as three consecutive numbers such as ``123'' and ``246'' and three consecutive even numbers (or odd numbers) is determined. When the received display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command indicating a loss, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (lost pattern) different from the above-described big win patterns and small win patterns is determined.

In determining these stop patterns, the performance control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop patterns, and determines the stop patterns of the decorative patterns by using a stop pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns and numerical values are associated with each other. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

After executing 245SGS276, the effect control CPU 120 executes a reel effect determination process (245SGS276a) for executing a reel effect in which a reel image 245SG005G is displayed on the image display device 5, and predetermined symbols are displayed in a variable manner within the reel image 245SG005G. Then, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach variation pattern (245SG277). Whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of Super Reach can be specified from the variation pattern designation command read in 245SG275. When the variation pattern of the variable display is the super ready-to-win variation pattern (245SG277; Y), cut-in performance determination processing (245SGS278) for determining whether or not to execute a cut-in performance to be described later during the ready-to-win performance and the performance pattern of the cut-in performance is executed, and the process proceeds to 245SGS279. Further, when the variation pattern of the variable display is not the super reach variation pattern (245SG277; N), the process proceeds to 245SGS279 without executing the process of 245SGS278.

Then, at 245SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect described later in the variable display and the effect pattern of the notice effect (245SGS279). As shown in FIGS. 8-31 to 8-34, the advance notice effect is a effect that can be executed during the variable display of the non-reach variation pattern excluding the shortened non-reach, and in the variable display of the normal reach and super reach variation patterns, the effect that can be performed during the period from the start of the variable display to the timing of the reach.

After executing 245SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command (245SGS280). Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (245SGS281).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device (image display device 5 as a component for effect, various lamps as components for effect, speakers 8L and 8R as components for effect, operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (245SGS282). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one.

Then, the variable time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time (variable display time) specified by the variable pattern designation command (245SGS283). Also, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (245SGS284). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns into the VRAM each time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (245SGS285).

FIG. 8-20 is a flow chart showing an example of the reel effect determination process (245SGSGS276a) executed by the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the reel effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-20, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the game state at that time (245SGSGS291). Then, it is determined whether or not the specified gaming state is the normal state (low probability/low base state) (245SGSGS292).

If the specified gaming state is not the normal state (245SGSGS292; N), the reel effect determination process is terminated. Therefore, in this characterizing portion 245SG, the execution of the reel effect is not determined in the time-saving state (low-probability-high base state) or probability-variable state (high-probability-high base state) which are game states other than the normal state.

On the other hand, when the specified game state is the normal state (245SGSGS292; Y), the variable display result is specified based on the setting value at that time and the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11 (245SGSGS293).

Then, based on the specified setting value, it is determined whether or not to display a "cherry" symbol as the effect result of the reel effect (symbol to be stopped and displayed) (245SGSGS294). These "cherry" symbols are determined by extracting a cherry symbol random number value, and determining whether or not the extracted cherry symbol random number value matches the winning determination value associated with each set value in a cherry symbol determination table (not shown) at the ratio shown in FIG. 8-21(A).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21(A), when the setting value is set to 1, the display of the "cherry" design is determined at a rate of 0.5%, when the setting value is set to 2, the display of the "cherry" design is determined at a rate of 1.0%, when the setting value is set to 3, the display of the "cherry" design is determined at a rate of 1.5%, and when the setting value is set to 4, the display of the "cherry" design is determined at a rate of 2.0%. The display of the pattern is determined, and when the set value is set to 5, the display of the "cherry" pattern is determined at a rate of 2.5%, and when the set value is set to 6, the display of the "cherry" pattern is determined at a rate of 3.0%. In other words, the ratio of determining the display of the "cherry" pattern is small, but the larger the set value is, the more likely it is to be determined.

When the display of the "cherry" pattern is determined as the effect result of the reel effect (245SGSGS295; Y), the determined effect result is stored (245SGSGS300b), and the reel effect determination process is terminated. 245SGSGS296 to determine whether to display the watermelon symbol. As in the determination of whether or not to display the "cherry" symbol, the watermelon symbol random number value is extracted, and whether or not the extracted watermelon symbol random number value matches the winning determination value associated with each set value in the watermelon symbol determination table (not shown) is used to determine whether or not the "watermelon" symbol is to be displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21(B), when the set value is set to 1, the display of the "watermelon" design is determined at a rate of 6.5%, when the set value is set to 2, the display of the "watermelon" design is determined at a rate of 1.0%, when the set value is set to 3, the display of the "watermelon" design is determined at a rate of 1.5%, and when the set value is set to 4, the display of the "watermelon" design is determined at a rate of 2.0%. The display of the "watermelon" pattern is determined, and when the set value is set to 5, the display of the "watermelon" pattern is determined at a rate of 2.5%, and when the set value is set to 6, the display of the "watermelon" pattern is determined at a rate of 3.0%. That is, the ratio of determining the display of the "watermelon" pattern is higher than that of the "cherry" pattern, and the higher the set value is, the more likely the display is to be determined than in the case of the "cherry" pattern.

When the display of the "watermelon" pattern is determined as the effect result of the reel effect (245SGSGS297; Y), the determined effect result is stored (245SGSGS300b), and the reel effect determination process is terminated. It is determined whether or not it is a big hit (245SGSGS298).

If the variable display result is not a huge hit (245SGSGS298; n), if you proceed to 245SGSGS300D, and if the variable display result is large (245SGSGS298; Y), the result of the reel production based on the set value (Seva 7 "(Seva) (Seva) is a" 7 "design (7" design. Determine whether or not to display (245SGSGS299) to display). It should be noted that whether or not to display these "7" symbols is determined by extracting the seven symbol random number value and determining whether or not the extracted seven symbol random number value matches the winning determination value associated with each set value in the seven symbol determination table (not shown), at the ratio shown in FIG.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21(C), when the set value is set to 4, the display of the "7" pattern is determined at a rate of 1%, when the set value is set to 5, the display of the "7" design is determined at a rate of 3%, when the set value is set to 6, the display of the "7" design is determined at a rate of 5%, and when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, the display of the "7" design is not determined. are Therefore, by displaying the "7" symbol, it is definitely notified that the game will be a big hit, and that the set value is 4 or more.

When the display of the "7" symbol is determined as the effect result of the reel effect (245SGSGS300a; Y), the determined effect result is stored (245SGSGS300b), and the reel effect determination process is terminated. Based on the result of the variable display specified in 5SGSGS293, it is determined whether or not to display the "hot" symbol as the effect result of the reel effect (symbol to be stopped and displayed) (245SGSGS300d).

Whether or not to display these "hot" symbols is also extracted, and the extracted random number for hot-hot symbols is determined in the ratio shown in FIG.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), when the variable display result is a big hit, the display of the "hot" pattern is determined at a rate of 20%, and when the variable display result is a small hit or a loss other than the big hit, the display of the "hot" pattern is determined at a rate of 1%. Therefore, when the "hot" pattern is displayed, there are very few cases where a big win is not achieved, and a big win is almost certainly achieved.

Then, when the display of the "hot" pattern is determined as the performance result of the reel performance (245SGSGS300e; Y), the determined performance result is stored (245SGSGS300b), and the reel performance determination processing is terminated. It is determined whether or not to display a "chance" symbol as (symbols to be stopped and displayed) (245SGSGS300f).

Whether or not to display these "chance" symbols is also determined by extracting the random number for the chance symbol, and determining whether or not the extracted random number for the chance symbol matches the winning determination value associated with the variable display result "big win" and "other than the big win (minor win/lost)" in the table for determining the chance symbol (not shown) at the ratio shown in FIG.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21(E), when the variable display result is a big hit, the display of the "chance" pattern is determined at a rate of 50%, and when the variable display result is a small hit or a loss other than the big win, the display of the "chance" pattern is determined at a rate of 30%. Therefore, when the "chance" symbol is displayed, there is a high possibility of a big win.

Then, when the display of the "chance" pattern is determined as the effect result of the reel effect (245SGSGS300g; Y), the determined effect result is stored (245SGSGS300b), and the reel effect determination processing is terminated. Determine whether to display the pattern (245SGSGS300h).

Whether or not to display these "bell" patterns is also determined by extracting random numbers for bell patterns, and depending on whether or not the extracted random numbers for bell patterns match winning determination values associated with winning/non-winning in a bell pattern determination table (not shown), at the ratio shown in Fig. 8-21 (F).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21(F), 90% of the decisions are made to display the "bell" design, and 10% of the decisions are made not to display the "bell" design.

Then, when the display of the "bell" pattern is determined as the effect result of the reel effect (245SGSGS300i; Y), the determined effect result is stored (245SGSGS300b), and the reel effect determination process is terminated. has become

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 (A) to 8-21 (F), each pattern of "cherry", "watermelon", "7", "hot", and "chance" determines whether or not to be displayed at a rate according to the setting value and variable display result set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the "bell" pattern is a pattern which determines whether or not to be displayed at a constant rate regardless of these set values and variable display results. That is, when any one of the symbols ``cherry'', ``watermelon'', ``7'', ``extremely hot'', and ``chance'' is statically displayed on the reel image 245SG005G as the performance result of the reel performance, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 and the result of variable display are suggested, while when the ``bell'' pattern is statically displayed on the reel image 245SG005G as the performance result of the reel performance, nothing is suggested.

In addition, in this characteristic part 245SG, the reel production is exemplified in a form that can be executed only during the variable display of the low-probability-low base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel production may be executable during the variable display of the probability-variable state or the time-saving state (high-probability-high base state, low-probability-high base state).

As shown in FIG. 8-37, the reel effect in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment is such that the reel image 245SG005G is displayed on the image display device 5 by the player operating the stick controller 31A and the reel image 245SG005G is displayed in the reel image 245SG005G (reel variation is performed) by the player operating the stick controller 31A until a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the variable display. Then, as a performance result, one of the symbols "Cherry", "Watermelon", "7", "Extremely Hot", "Chance", and "Bell" is stopped and displayed in the reel image 245SG005G.

In addition, after the pattern of "cherry", "watermelon", "7", "intense oat", "chance", "bell", the reel image 245SG005G is a variable in the normal reach or super reached pattern in the reel image 245SG005g. Hidden in the dangel, and if the variable display is a variable display of the non -reach fluctuation pattern, it will be hidden at the timing before the end of the variable display.

8-22 to 8-24 are flowcharts showing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-19. In the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (245SGS301). If the variation pattern is the super reach α or super reach β variation pattern (245SGS301; Y), the cut-in effect determination processing is terminated, and if the variation pattern is the super reach γ or super reach δ variation pattern (245SGS301; N), it is further determined whether or not the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (245SGS302).

When the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach γ (245SGS301; Y), it is determined whether the variation pattern is PB1-5, that is, whether it is the variation pattern of super reach γ for executing the resurrection effect (245SGS303). When the variation pattern is PB1-5 (245SGS303; Y), the effect control CPU 120 identifies the jackpot type (245SGS304) and determines whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS305).

When the big win type is the big win A or the big win B (245SGS305; Y), the presence or absence of execution of the cut-in performance and the performance pattern are determined based on the fact that the big win type is the big win A or the big win B (245SGS306), and the process proceeds to 245SGS308. 8-25(A), the 245SGS306 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 10% based on the fact that the variation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is jackpot A or jackpot B. Further, as the execution of the cut-in performance, the performance pattern is determined to be the pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern CI-2 at a rate of 55%, the pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%, and the pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 and 8-40, the cut-in effect in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment displays an image of the push button 31B (operation promotion image 245SG005H) on the image display device 5 during the reach effect of super reach γ to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. When the push button 31B is operated during the push button 31B operation acceptance period or when the push button 31B operation acceptance period ends without the push button 31B being operated, the image display device 5 displays an effect and a cut-in image corresponding to each performance pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 and 8-40, if the production pattern is pattern CI-1, the image display device 5 displays a cut-in image 245SG005w with a blue effect, if the production pattern is pattern CI-2, the image display device 5 displays a cut-in image 245SG005x with a red effect, and if the production pattern is pattern CI-3, the image display device 5 displays a cut-in image 245SG005y with a gold effect. If the production pattern is pattern CI-4, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 245SG005z with a rainbow effect.

When the jackpot type is the jackpot C (245SGS305; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in performance and a performance pattern based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot C (245SGS307), and proceeds to 245SGS308. As shown in FIG. 8-25(A), the 245SGS307 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 10% based on the fact that the variation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is the jackpot C. Further, as the execution of the cut-in performance, the performance pattern is determined to be the pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern CI-2 at a rate of 54%, the pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%, and the pattern CI-4 at a rate of 1%.

After executing 245SGS306 or 245SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the cut-in effect is determined (245SGS308). When execution of cut-in performance is determined (245SGS308; Y), the determined performance pattern is stored, a value corresponding to the period until the start of cut-in performance is set in a timer for waiting for start of cut-in performance (245SGS309, 245SGS310), and cut-in performance determination processing is terminated.

In addition, when the variation pattern in 245SGS303 is the variation pattern (PA2-4 or PB1-4) of super reach γ that does not execute the resurrection effect (245SGS303; N), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 (245SGS311), and determines whether the specified set value is any one of 1 to 3 (245SGS312). . The setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be specified based on the setting value designation command received from the CPU 103 .

When execution of the cut-in performance is decided in the cut-in performance determination processing, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer waiting for the start of the cut-in performance by -1 each time the performance processing during variable display (S172) is executed, and when the timer for waiting the start of the cut-in performance runs out, sets a process table for the cut-in performance corresponding to the determined performance pattern. After that, the effect control CPU 120 may execute the cut-in effect by controlling the effect devices (the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, etc.) according to the contents of the data (process data) in the process table for the cut-in effect each time the variable display effect process is executed.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3 (245SGS312; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (308SGS313). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit. When the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS313; Y), the jackpot type is specified (245SGS314), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS315).

When the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B (245SGS3315; Y), the presence or absence of the cut-in performance and the performance pattern are determined based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B (245SGS3316), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. As shown in FIG. 8-25(B), the 245SGS316 determines non-execution of the cut-in performance at a rate of 10% based on the fact that the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is the jackpot A or jackpot B. As the cut-in performance is executed, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is the jackpot C (245SGS315; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute cut-in performance and the performance pattern based on the fact that the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C (245SGS317), and executes the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310. As shown in FIG. 8-25(B), the 245SGS317 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 10% based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is the jackpot C. As the cut-in performance is executed, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

Incidentally, when the variable display result is a failure in 245SGS313 (245SGS313; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is a failure (245SGS318), and executes the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310. As shown in FIG. 8-25(B), the 245SGS318 decides not to execute the cut-in effect at a rate of 55% based on the set value being any one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result being a failure. Further, as the execution of the cut-in performance, the performance pattern is determined to be the pattern CI-1 at a rate of 35%, the pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, the pattern CI-3 at a rate of 0%, and the pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in 245SGS312 is any one of 4 to 6 (245SGS312; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4 (245SGS221). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4 (245SGS321; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS322). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS322; Y), the jackpot type is specified (245SGS323), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS324).

When the big win type is the big win A or the big win B (245SGS324; Y), the presence or absence of execution of the cut-in performance and the performance pattern are determined based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the big win type is the big win A or the big win B (245SGS325), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. As shown in FIG. 8-25(C), the 245SGS325 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 10% based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. As the cut-in performance is executed, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is the jackpot C (245SGS324; N), whether or not to execute a cut-in performance and the performance pattern are determined (245SGS326) based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C, and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. As shown in FIG. 8-25(C), the 245SGS326 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 10% based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot C. As the cut-in performance is executed, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost in 245SGS322 (245SGS322; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is the high-probability-high base state (245SGS327). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

When the game state is the high-probability-high base state (245SGS327; Y), based on the fact that the set value is 4, the variable display result is wrong, and the game state is the high-probability-high base state, the presence or absence of execution of the cut-in production and the production pattern are determined (245SGS328), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. As shown in FIG. 8-25(C), the 245SGS328 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 40% based on the fact that the set value is 4, that the variable display result is a failure, and that the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Further, as the execution of the cut-in performance, the performance pattern is determined to be the pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, the pattern CI-3 at a rate of 20%, and the pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the game state is the low-probability-high base state or the low-probability-low base state (245SGS327; N), based on the fact that the set value is 4, the variable display result is wrong, and the game state is the low-probability-high base state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of execution of the cut-in production and the production pattern are determined (245SGS329), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 245SGS329, as shown in FIG. 8-25(C), based on that the set value is 4, that the variable display result is wrong, and that the game state is the low-probability-high base state or the low-probability-low base state, non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 59%. Further, as the execution of cut-in performance, the performance pattern is determined as pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, pattern CI-3 at a rate of 1%, and pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is not 4 in 245SGS321 (245SGS321; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5 (245SGS330). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5 (245SGS330; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS331). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS331; Y), the big hit type is specified (245SGS332), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (245SGS333).

When the big win type is the big win A or the big win B (245SGS333; Y), whether or not the cut-in performance is executed and the performance pattern are determined based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the big win type is the big win A or the big win B (245SGS334), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. As shown in FIG. 8-25(D), the 245SGS334 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 10% based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. As the cut-in performance is executed, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is the jackpot C (245SGS333; N), whether or not to execute a cut-in performance and a performance pattern are determined based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C (245SGS335), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 245SGS335, as shown in FIG. 8-25(D), based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is jackpot C, non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. As the cut-in performance is executed, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost in 245SGS331 (245SGS331; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is the high-probability-high base state (245SGS336). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

When the game state is the high-probability-high base state (245SGS336; Y), based on the fact that the set value is 5, the variable display result is wrong, and the game state is the high-probability-high base state, the presence or absence of execution of the cut-in production and the production pattern are determined (245SGS337), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 245SGS337, as shown in FIG. 8-25(D), based on the fact that the set value is 5, that the variable display result is wrong, and that the game state is the high-probability-high base state, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 35%. As the cut-in performance is executed, the performance pattern is determined to be the pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, the pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%, and the pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the game state is the low-probability-high base state or the low-probability-low base state (245SGS336; N), based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the variable display result is wrong and the game state is the low-probability-high base state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of execution of the cut-in production and the production pattern are determined (245SGS338), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 245SGS338, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (D), based on that the set value is 5, that the variable display result is wrong, and that the game state is the low-probability-high base state or the low-probability-low base state, non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 58%. Further, as the execution of cut-in performance, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, pattern CI-3 at a rate of 2%, and pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is not 5 at 245SGS330 (245SGS330; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variable display result is a big hit or not, assuming that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6 (245SGS339). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS339; Y), the jackpot type is specified (245SGS340), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS341).

When the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B (245SGS341; Y), the presence or absence of execution of cut-in performance and the performance pattern are determined based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B (245SGS342), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. As shown in FIG. 8-25(E), the 245SGS342 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 10% based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. As the cut-in performance is executed, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (245SGS341; N), the presence or absence of cut-in performance and the performance pattern are determined based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C (245SGS343), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 245SGS343, as shown in FIG. 8-25(E), based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. As the cut-in performance is executed, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is a loss at 245SGS339 (245SGS339; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is a high probability high base state (245SGS344). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

When the game state is the high-probability-high base state (245SGS344; Y), based on the fact that the set value is 6, the variable display result is wrong, and the game state is the high-probability-high base state, the presence or absence of execution of the cut-in production and the production pattern are determined (245SGS345), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. In the 245SGS345, as shown in FIG. 8-25(E), based on the fact that the set value is 6, the result of the variable display is wrong, and the game state is the high-probability-high base state, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 30%. Further, as the cut-in performance, the pattern CI-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern CI-2 is determined at a rate of 10%, the pattern CI-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the game state is the low-probability-high base state or the low-probability-low base state (245SGS344; N), based on the fact that the set value is 6, the variable display result is wrong, and the game state is the low-probability-high base state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of the cut-in performance and the performance pattern are determined (245SGS346), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 245SGS346, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (E), based on that the set value is 6, that the variable display result is wrong, and that the game state is the low-probability-high base state or the low-probability-low base state, non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 57%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in performance, the performance pattern is determined to be the pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, the pattern CI-3 at a rate of 3%, and the pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, in 245SGS302, when it is a super reach δ variation pattern (PS2-5 or PB1-6) (202SGS302; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS351). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS351; Y), the jackpot type is specified (245SGS352), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS353).

When the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B (245SGS353; Y), the presence or absence of the cut-in performance and the performance pattern are determined based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B (245SGS354), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. As shown in FIG. 8-26, the 245SGS354 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. FIG. As the cut-in performance is executed, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is the jackpot C (245SGS353; N), the presence or absence of cut-in performance and the performance pattern are determined based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot C (245SGS355), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. Incidentally, in 245SGS355, as shown in FIG. 8-26, based on the fact that the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. As the cut-in performance is executed, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

Incidentally, when the variable display result is a failure in 245SGS351 (245SGS351; N), the presence or absence of execution of cut-in performance and the performance pattern are determined based on the fact that the variable display result is failure (245SGS356), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. Incidentally, in 245SGS356, as shown in FIG. 8-26, based on the result of the variable display being a failure, the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 35%. As the cut-in performance is executed, the performance pattern is determined to be the pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, the pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%, and the pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 and 8-26, when variable display is executed with the variation patterns of super reach γ and super reach δ, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (big hit expectation) is lowest when cut-in effects are not executed, and when cut-in effects are executed in pattern CI-1, when cut-in effects are executed in pattern CI-2, cut-in effects are executed in pattern CI-3. When the pattern CI-4 is executed in the cut-in performance, the ratio of the variable display result to be a big win is set to increase (expectation of the big win in the cut-in performance: non-execution<pattern CI-1<pattern CI-2<pattern CI-3<pattern CI-4).

In particular, when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-4, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, it is determined that the variable display result is the big win and the big win type is the big win C.例文帳に追加

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-25, 8-26, and 8-28, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 when variable display is executed with the variation patterns of super reach γ and super reach δ is set to be the lowest (0%) when the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the variation pattern is super reach γ out of super reach γ/super reach out of δ. Then, if the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that executes a resurrection performance, if the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the variation pattern does not execute a resurrection performance - if the set value is 4 and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute a resurrection performance, if the set value is 5 and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute a resurrection performance, the set value is 6 and the variation pattern executes a resurrection performance. It is set so that the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 increases in the order of the super reach γ jackpot that does not occur.

When the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) in which the resurrection performance is not executed, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1 to 3, it is confirmed that the variable display result will be a big win (any of the jackpots A to C) when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3, while when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4 to 6, the cut-in performance is pattern C. Even if it is executed at I-3, the variable display result may be misplaced. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the degree of expectation for the big hit is set lower than when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3 when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3. Therefore, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3 when the ready-to-win performance of the super reach γ is executed and the variable display result is lost, it is determined that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6.

On the other hand, focusing on the variation pattern (PB1-5) of the super ready-to-win γ jackpot for executing the resurrection performance, the rate at which the cut-in performance is executed in patterns CI-3 and CI-4 is set lower than the variation pattern (PB1-4) for the super ready-to-win γ jackpot for executing the resurrection performance. Therefore, in the case where the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super ready-to-win γ big win in which the resurrection performance is not executed, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 becomes any one of 4 to 6 due to the fact that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is confirmed to be any one of 4 to 6 due to the fact that the cut-in performance is executed in CI-3 and the failure is reported, but the player recognizes that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is confirmed to be any one of 4 to 6 after the resurrection performance is executed and the big win is reported. It is suppressed that the player is discouraged due to indefiniteness of whether or not it is.

Also, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) in which the resurrection effect is not executed, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the same for any set value when the variable display result is a big hit, but when the variable display result is a loss, the higher the set value, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3. is set high (percentage of execution of pattern CI-3 at the time of failure when setting values are 4 to 6: setting value 4<setting value 5<setting value 6).

Therefore, in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, the higher the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the higher the frequency that the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is lost.

In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variation pattern is a super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect, if the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is the same and the variable display result is different, the cut-in effect is performed at a higher rate than when the game state is the low-probability-high base state or the low-probability-low base state. It is set to be executed in pattern CI-3.

Therefore, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of the high-probability-high base state, and the variable display result is lost, so that even after the game state shifts to the low-probability-low base state, the player can be urged to continue the game by setting one of the set values 4 to 6 in the pachinko game machine 1, so that the game interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 (B) to 8-25 (E), focusing on the case where the variable display result is lost, the higher the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the higher the cut-in effect execution ratio is set. That is, in the present characteristic part 245SG, the ratio itself of executing the cut-in performance when the variable display result is lost suggests that any one of the set values 4 to 6 is set in the pachinko game machine 1, so that the player can be made to pay attention to whether the cut-in performance is executed or not in addition to whether the cut-in performance is executed in a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, and the interest in the game can be improved.

8-25 and 8-26 are merely examples, and the determination ratio of the cut-in effect effect patterns may be appropriately different from the characteristic portion 245SG according to the gaming machine to which the present invention is applied. However, when the decision ratio of the performance pattern of these cut-in performances is appropriately varied, it is desirable to prevent the player from misunderstanding the expectation of the big win corresponding to the performance pattern of the cut-in performance when executing the cut-in performance by maintaining the tendency of the expectation of the big win of each performance pattern (the expectation of the big win in the cut-in performance: non-execution < pattern CI-1 < pattern CI-2 < pattern CI-3 < pattern CI-4) itself.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 and 8-26, the characterizing section 245SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which, when performing variable display in accordance with the variation patterns of super reach γ and super reach δ, the ratio of performing cut-in effects during variable display is varied according to the set value set in pachinko gaming machine 1 and the result of variable display. In the case of execution, the cut-in effect may always be executed during the variable display. In the case where the cut-in effect is always executed during the variable display of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, if the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the ratio (see FIGS. 8-25 (C) to 8-25 (E)) assigned to the non-execution of the cut-in effect when the variable display result is lost is set to both the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2 with a low expectation of a big hit. By allocating, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 may be maintained so as not to differ from the characteristic portion 245SG. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 due to excessive execution of the cut-in performance in the pattern CI-3, while improving interest by executing the cut-in performance during the variable display of the super reach γ and the super reach δ.

FIG. 8-29 is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect determination process in FIG. 8-19. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (245SGS361). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a small hit (245SGS362). When the variable display result is a small hit (245SGS362; Y), the advance notice performance determination processing is terminated, and when the variable display result is a big hit or a loss (245SGS362; N), it is further determined whether or not execution of cut-in performance is determined, that is, whether or not any performance pattern of cut-in performance is stored (245SGS363).

When execution of cut-in effect is determined (245SGS363; Y), it is further determined whether or not the stored effect pattern of cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (245SGS364). When the performance pattern of the stored cut-in performance is the pattern CI-3 or CI-4 (245SGS364; Y), the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3 or CI-4, and whether or not to execute the advance notice performance and the performance pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern (245SGS365).

On the other hand, when non-execution of cut-in performance is determined (245SGS363; N) or when the stored performance pattern is pattern CI-1 or CI-2 (245SGS364; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a big win (245SGS366). When the variable display result is a big win (245SGS366; Y), the big win type is specified (245SGS367), and whether or not to execute the notice effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified big win type (245SGS368).

If the variable display result is a failure (245SGS366; N), whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern (245SGS369).

Specifically, in the process of 245SGS365, as shown in FIG. 8-30(A), when the result of the variable display is a big win, it is decided not to execute the notice effect at a rate of 15%. Further, as execution of the advance notice performance, the performance pattern is determined to be the pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 at a rate of 55%, the pattern YE-3 at a rate of 0%, and the pattern YE-4 at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is super reach (super reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, as execution of the advance notice performance, the performance pattern is determined to be the pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 at a rate of 20%, the pattern YE-3 at a rate of 0%, and the pattern YE-4 at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of line, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variation pattern is the super reach γ deviation (PA2-4) variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 8-30(C), pattern YE-1 is an effect pattern in which an image 245SG005s of character A is displayed on the image display device 5 with a blue effect, pattern YE-2 is an effect pattern in which an image 245SG005t of character B is displayed on the image display device 5 with a red effect, and pattern YE-3 is an effect pattern in which an image 245SG005u of character C is displayed on the image display device 5 with a gold effect. Pattern YE-4 is an effect pattern for displaying a collective image 245SG005v of characters A to C on the image display device 5 with a rainbow color effect.

Further, in the process of 245SGS368, as shown in FIG. 8-30(B), when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as execution of the advance notice performance, the performance pattern is determined to be the pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 at a rate of 45%, the pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%, and the pattern YE-4 at a rate of 0%. Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C, non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as execution of the advance notice performance, the performance pattern is determined to be the pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 at a rate of 40%, the pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%, and the pattern YE-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, in the process of 245SGS369, as shown in FIG. 8-30(B), when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is super reach (super reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, as execution of the advance notice performance, the performance pattern is determined to be the pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 at a rate of 15%, the pattern YE-3 at a rate of 5%, and the pattern YE-4 at a rate of 0%.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a loss and the variation pattern is normal reach (normal reach loss), non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. Further, as execution of the advance notice performance, the performance pattern is determined to be the pattern YE-1 at a rate of 15%, the pattern YE-2 at a rate of 5%, the pattern YE-3 at a rate of 0%, and the pattern YE-4 at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach lost) excluding shortened non-reach, non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. Further, as execution of the advance notice performance, the performance pattern is determined to be the pattern YE-1 at a rate of 5%, the pattern YE-2 at a rate of 0%, the pattern YE-3 at a rate of 0%, and the pattern YE-4 at a rate of 0%.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 8-38, the advance notice effect in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment displays an image of the push button 31B (operation prompting image 245SG005H) on the image display device 5 during the variable display (during the period from the start of the variable display until reaching the reach if the variable display of the reach variation pattern is being performed) to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. When the push button 31B is operated during the period for accepting the operation of the push button 31B or when the period for accepting the operation of the push button 31B ends without operating the push button 31B, the image display device 5 displays a character image corresponding to each performance pattern.

Therefore, if the variation pattern is a shortened non-reach, the period for executing the notice effect is extremely short (for example, if the notice effect is executed during variable display with the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-3) whose special figure variation time is 3.75 seconds, the period for displaying the operation promoting image 245SG005H is extremely short, about 1 second, and the period for displaying the character image is about 1 to 2 seconds). In the case of hit, the notice performance is not executed during variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notice performance may be executed during variable display even when the variation pattern is shortened non-reach.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be the lowest when the advance notice effect is not executed during the variable display, and the ratio of the variable display result to the big win is set to be higher in the order of the notice effect being executed in the pattern YE-1, the notice effect being executed in the pattern YE-2, the notice effect being executed in the pattern YE-3, and the notice effect being executed in the YE-4. (Expectation of jackpot effect: non-execution of advance notice effect<execution in pattern YE-1<execution in pattern YE-2<execution in pattern YE-3<execution in pattern YE-4).

In particular, as shown in FIG. 8-30(B), when it is determined not to execute the cut-in performance, or when the cut-in performance is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2 having a lower expectation for the big win than the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, there is provided a case where the notice performance is executed in the pattern YE-4 only when the big win type is the big win C. Therefore, in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, in addition to whether or not the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-30(A), in the case where pattern CI-3, which has a higher expectation of big win than pattern CI-1 or CI-2, or pattern CI-4, which confirms that the variable display result will be a big hit and that the type of big win is C, is already determined as a production pattern of the cut-in production, YE-3 and YE-4 are set so as not to be executed as the production pattern of the advance notice production regardless of the variable display result and the variation pattern. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big win, the cut-in performance can be executed only by the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2, thereby preventing the player from recognizing that the variable display result is a big win at the timing (the start timing of the advance notice performance) before the start timing of the cut-in performance. Furthermore, when the variable display result is lost, both the advance notice performance and the cut-in performance are not executed in a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for the big win, so that the player is prevented from expecting excessively for the variable display result to be the big win.

After executing any one of 245SGS365, 245SGS368, and 245SGS369, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the advance notice effect is determined (245SGS370). When the execution of the notice performance is determined (245SGS370; Y), the performance pattern determined by any one of the processing of 245SGS365, 245SGS368 and 245SGS369 is stored (245SGS371), and the notice performance start waiting timer is set to end the notice performance determination processing (245SGS372). When it is decided not to execute the notice effect (245SGS370; N), the notice effect determination process is terminated without executing the processes of 245SGS371 and 245SGS372.

When the execution of the notice performance is decided in the notice performance determination processing, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer waiting for the start of the notice performance every time the performance processing during variable display (S172) is executed, and when the timer for waiting the start of the notice performance runs out, sets the process table for the notice performance corresponding to the determined performance pattern. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 may execute the notice effect by controlling the effect devices (the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, etc.) according to the contents of the data (process data) in the process table for the notice effect each time the effect processing during variable display is executed.

As described above, by making it possible to determine the execution of the reel effect, the cut-in effect, and the advance notice effect within the variable display start setting process, as shown in FIGS. Performance can be executed with pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2, and in the variation pattern of super reach α and super reach β, the advance notice performance can be executed with pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-3 in a period before reach during variable display. It should be noted that, in the fluctuation pattern of the loss of the normal reach, the loss of the super reach α, and the loss of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect cannot be executed in the period after the reach.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 245SG, it is possible to execute the reel performance during the variable display of shortened non-reach, and the special figure fluctuation time of the variable display of shortened non-reach is set to 3.75 seconds at the shortest. Therefore, the execution period of the reel effect including the operation reception period of the stick controller 31A in the characteristic portion 245SG is set to approximately 3 seconds to 3.5 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8-32(B), in the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ and super reach δ, the advance notice effect can be executed in patterns YE-1 to YE-3 in the period before reach, and the cut-in effect can be executed in pattern CI-1 to pattern CI-3 in the period after reach. However, when execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 is determined, the advance notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-33 and 8-34, in the variation patterns of the super ready-to-win γ jackpot with no resurrection performance and the super ready-to-win γ jackpot with resurrection performance, the advance notice performance can be executed in patterns YE-1 to YE-4 in the period before ready-to-win, and the cut-in performance can be executed in patterns CI-1 to CI-4 in the period after ready-to-win. However, when execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 is determined, the advance notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-31 to 8-34, in any case, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reel effect is executed by the player operating the stick controller 31A during the period from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the advance notice effect.

It should be noted that during the operation reception period of the stick controller 31A in the reel performance, unlike the operation reception period of the push button 31B of the notice performance and the cut-in performance, the image display device 5 does not display an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the stick controller 31A. In other words, unlike the notice effect and the cut-in effect, the reel effect in this characterizing portion 245SG is an effect that is not executed unless the player operates the stick controller 31A during the operation accepting period of the stick controller 31A.

Furthermore, since the operation reception period of the stick controller 31A in the reel performance and the operation reception period of the push button 31B in the notice performance do not overlap, the player does not need to simultaneously operate the stick controller 31A for executing the reel performance and the operation of the push button 31B for displaying the character image as the notice performance, thereby preventing the player's operation for executing the performance from becoming complicated.

When execution of both the advance notice performance and the reel performance is determined at the start of the variable display, the performance periods of the notice performance and the reel performance are partially overlapped by operating the stick controller 31A during the operation acceptance period of the stick controller 31A.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 8-35, this characterizing portion 245SG is provided with a reel effect, a notice effect, and a cut-in effect as effects that can be executed during the variable display. Of these effects, the reel effect is an effect executed by the player operating the stick controller 31A, and no operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the operation acceptance period of the stick controller 31A. Further, the object suggested by the reel performance is the degree of expectation for big win or the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, or both of them, and the period during which the performance can be executed is from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display (when the variation pattern is non-ready-to-win) or from the start of the variable display to the ready-to-win (when the variation pattern is normal-to-reach or super-to-reach).

Further, the notice effect is a effect executed when the player operates the push button 31B or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B elapses, and the operation promotion image 245SG005H is displayed on the image display device 5 during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. Further, the object suggested by the advance notice performance is only the degree of expectation for a big hit, and the period during which the performance can be executed is from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display (when the variation pattern is non-reach out) or from the start of the variable display to the reach (when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach).

The cut-in effect is a effect executed when the player operates the push button 31B or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B elapses, and an operation promotion image 245SG005H is displayed on the image display device 5 during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. Further, the target suggested by the cut-in effect is the degree of expectation for big win, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, or both, and the period during which the effect can be executed is after reach.

Next, the display control section 123 in the characteristic section 245SG will be described. As shown in FIGS. 8-36A and 8-36B, the display control unit 123 has a first layer 245SG301, a second layer 245SG302, a third layer 245SG303, and a fourth layer 245SG304 as layers for drawing images. It can be displayed on the image display device 5 .

Among these layers, the first layer 245SG301 is the highest layer (top layer), and is a layer for drawing an error notification image 245SG005J and a fourth pattern 245SG005F as game progress information display corresponding to the progress of the game. The second layer 245SG302 is a layer lower than the first layer 245SG301, and is a layer for drawing a reel effect (reel image 245SG005G). The third layer 245SG303 is a layer lower than the second layer 245SG302, and includes an announcement effect (character A image 245SG005s, character B image 245SG005t, character C image 245SG005u, character A to C group image 245SG005v, and push button 31B operation promotion image 245SG005H) and a cut-in effect (cut-in image 2). 45SG005w, 245SG005x, 245SG005y, 245SG005, and the operation promotion image 245SG005H of the push button 31B). The fourth layer 245SG304 is a lower layer (lowest layer) than the third layer 245SG303, and is a layer for drawing variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R and reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 245SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 245SG005U.

Therefore, in the characteristic portion 245SG, the image drawn on the third layer 245SG303 is displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the image drawn on the fourth layer 245SG304, the image drawn on the second layer 245SG302 is displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the images drawn on the third layer 245SG303 and the fourth layer 245SG304, and the first layer. The image drawn on the 245SG301 is displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the images drawn on the second layer 245SG302 to the fourth layer 245SG304.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 when executing the variable display in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-37 to 8-41. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-37(A) and 8-37(B), when execution of the reel effect and non-execution of the cut-in effect are determined at the start of the variable display, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed at the lower center of the image display device 5 by the player operating the stick controller 31A during the operation accepting period of the stick controller 31A. Since the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the decoration symbols and the reserved display, part of the decoration symbols and the reserved display is hidden by the reel image 245SG005G.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-37(C) to 8-37(H), symbols such as ``Cherry'', ``Watermelon'', ``7'', ``Hot'', ``Chance'', and ``Bell'' are stopped and displayed as variable display results in the reel image 245SG005G, suggesting that the set values and variable display results set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be a big hit.

After symbols such as ``Cherry'', ``Watermelon'', ``7'', ``Hot'', ``Chance'', and ``Bell'' are stopped and displayed on the reel image 245SG005G, the display of the reel image 245SG005G on the image display device 5 ends before the end of the ready-to-win or variable display.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-38(A) and 8-38(B), when non-execution of the reel effect and execution of the advance notice effect are determined at the start of the variable display, the image display device 5 displays an image of the push button 31B (operation prompting image 245SG005H) for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B after the start of the variable display.

When the player operates the push button 31B during the period for accepting the operation of the push button 31B, or when the period for accepting the operation of the push button 31B elapses, the notice performance is executed in any one of patterns YE-1 to YE-4 on the image display device 5.例文帳に追加Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-38(C) to 8-38(F), when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1, the image 245SG005s of the character A is displayed with the blue effect on the image display device 5, and when the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2, the image 245SG005t of the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 with the red effect. When the image 245SG005u of the character C is displayed with a golden effect on the device 5 and the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4, the image display device 5 displays a collective image 245SG005v of the characters A to C with a rainbow effect.

At this time, the player can recognize the degree of expectation for a big hit by which of the character images 245SG005s, 245SG005t, 245SG005u, and 245SG005v the image displayed on the image display device 5 is and the color of the effect displayed together with the character image.

As described above, when the pattern CI-3 or CI-4 is determined to be executed as the cut-in effect at the start of the variable display, the pattern YE-1 or YE-2 can be executed as the advance notice effect.

Note that the operation prompting image 245SG005H, the image 245SG005s of character A, the image 245SG005t of character B, the image 245SG005u of character C, and the set image 245SG005v of characters A to C in the advance notice effect are displayed with priority over the decorative design and the reserved display, so part of the decorative design and the reserved display are part of the operation promotion image 245SG005H and the image 245 of character A. It is hidden by SG005s, an image 245SG005t of character B, an image 245SG005u of character C, and a group image 245SG005v of characters A to C.

On the other hand, the fourth symbol 245SG005F is displayed with priority over the operation promoting image 245SG005H, the image 245SG005s of the character A, the image 245SG005t of the character B, the image 245SG005u of the character C, and the set image 245SG005v of the characters A to C in the preview effect, so the characters A to C whose display area overlaps with the fourth symbol 245SG005F. A part of the set image 245SG005v is hidden by the fourth pattern 245SG005F (see FIG. 8-38(F)).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-39(A) and 8-39(B), when execution of the reel effect and execution of the advance notice effect are determined at the start of the variable display, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed at the lower center of the image display device 5 by the player operating the stick controller 31A during the operation reception period of the stick controller 31A. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-39(C), during the variable display in the reel image 245SG005G, an image of the push button 31B (operation prompting image 245SG005H) for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed on the image display device 5. As described above, the reel image 245SG005G and the operation prompting image 245SG005H are displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the decorative symbols and the pending display.

When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B elapses, as shown in FIGS.

Note that the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the preview effect (the image 245SG005s of the character A, the image 245SG005t of the character B, the image 245SG005u of the character C, and the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C). Partially obscured by G. Further, as described above, the fourth pattern 245SG005F is displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the advance notice effect (collective image 245SG005v of characters A to C).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (F), when the CPU 103 detects an error such as an abnormal winning or a magnetic error during execution of reel effects or cut-in effects, an error notification image 245SG005J corresponding to the error that occurred in the image display device 5 is displayed.

At this time, the error notification image 245SG005J is displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) and the notice effect (group image 245SG005v of characters A to C). be done.

Then, when the variable display is super reach γ variable display, decoration patterns are displayed in a combination of reach as shown in FIGS.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-40(D), when it is time to start executing the cut-in effect during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach γ, the image of the push button 31B (operation prompting image 245SG005H) starts to be displayed on the image display device 5, and the player is notified to operate the push button 31B. At this time, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, or when the operation reception period of the push button 31B passes without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, the effect is displayed together with the cut-in image corresponding to the performance pattern of the cut-in performance on the image display device 5.例文帳に追加

Specifically, when the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-1, the cut-in image 245SG005w is displayed with a blue effect on the image display device 5, and when the cut-in effect is performed with the pattern CI-2, the cut-in image 245SG005x is displayed with a red effect on the image display device 5, and when the cut-in effect is performed with the pattern CI-3, the cut-in image 245SG005y is displayed with a gold effect on the image display device 5. When the announcement effect is executed in the pattern YE-4, the cut-in image 245SG005z is displayed on the image display device 5 with a rainbow effect.

At this time, the player can recognize the degree of expectation for a big hit by which of the cut-in images 245SG005w, 245SG005x, 245SG005y, and 245SG005z the cut-in images displayed on the image display device 5 are and the colors of the effects displayed together with these cut-in images.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-41(A) and 8-41(B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PS2-4 (super reach γ loss variation pattern), it is notified that the variable display result is lost due to the friend character losing to the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of super reach γ, and the variable display ends. Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-41(A) and 8-41(C), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot variation pattern in which the resurrection effect is not executed), it is notified that the variable display result is a big win when the ally character wins the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ, and the variable display ends.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-41(A), 8-41(D) to 8-41(F), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-5 (super reach γ jackpot variation pattern for executing resurrection effect), it is notified that the variable display result is lost once when the friend character is defeated by the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of super reach γ. Then, by executing the resurrection performance, it is reported again that the variable display result is a big hit by the ally character's victory over the enemy character as the ready-to-win performance result (battle performance result) of the super reach γ, and the variable display is finished.

Although not shown in the figure, when the variable display is the variable display of super reach δ, after the decoration pattern is displayed in combination with reach γ, a battle performance in which a friend character and an enemy character fight is executed in the same way as the reach performance of super reach γ. Then, when the cut-in effect is executed during the battle effect, the variable display result is always a big hit by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3. The battle performance as the ready-to-reach performance of super reach δ may be the same as the battle performance to the ready-to-reach performance of super reach γ, but may be partially different in the characters to be fought and the development of the battle.

As described above, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, thereby confirming that the variable display result will be a big win. is provided. That is, when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is lost, it is determined that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, so that the player can be made to pay attention to whether the variable display result will be a big win or a failure when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-25, as variation patterns that can execute the cut-in effect during the ready-to-win effect, there is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern (super ready-to-win γ big win variation pattern for executing a revival effect, PB1-5) in which a revival effect is executed after the variable display result is once notified that the variable display result is a win, and a super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern in which the revival effect is executed, PB1-5). A variation pattern (PB1-4) is provided, and when variable display is performed with the super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern for executing the resurrection performance, the ratio of performing the cut-in performance with the pattern CI-3 is set lower than when variable display is performed with the super ready-to-win γ big win variation pattern for not performing the resurrection performance. Therefore, when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the ready-to-win performance of the super reach γ and it is notified that the variable display is lost, even if the player recognizes that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the resurrection performance is executed and the variable display is notified that it is a big hit. A decrease in interest can be reduced.

In the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are set to 1 to 3 as unfavorable set values and 4 to 6 as advantageous set values. can be set to any non-overlapping range. Specifically, only 1 to 5 disadvantageous setting values and 6 advantageous setting values may be used, or only 1 disadvantageous setting value and 2 to 6 advantageous setting values may be used.

In addition, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, the suggestive effect in the present invention is illustrated as a ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the suggestive effect in the present invention may be any effect other than the ready-to-win effect, such as a pseudo-continuous effect in which the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative pattern are repeatedly executed, as long as it is an effect that can be executed during the variable display.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-25(C) to 8-25(E), when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, when the variable display is executed in the super reach γ deviation variation pattern, the rate of execution of the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is highest when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and the cut-in effect is most cut when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4. The rate at which the in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 is set low. Therefore, the higher the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more frequently the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is lost, and the player can expect the higher set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, thereby improving the game amusement.

In the characterizing part 245SG of the embodiment, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the super reach γ deviation variation pattern, the higher the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3. When the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the deviation of super reach γ when the set value is any one of 4 to 6, the ratio of execution of the cut-in performance in the pattern CI-3 may be the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In this way, when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of super reach γ loss, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to specify which one of the set values 4 to 6 is set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, whether or not to execute any ready-to-win effect and whether or not to execute the resurrection effect is determined in advance in association with each variation pattern, and as shown in FIG. The ratio of executing the resurrection performance is the same regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, since the execution ratio of the resurrection performance during the variable display follows the set value for determining the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the resurrection performance is executed during the variable display, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, it is exemplified that which ready-to-win effect to be executed and whether to execute the resurrection effect are determined in advance in association with each variation pattern.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-26, as the variation patterns in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, variation patterns (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the ready-to-reach effect of the super reach δ are provided, and when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the ready-to-reach effect of the super reach δ, the variable display result always becomes a big hit, so variations in the super reach effect increase, and the cut-in to the ready-to-reach effect of the super reach δ increases. Since the performance is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the result of the variable display results in a big hit, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the ready-to-win effect of super reach δ is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern to execute the ready-to-win effect of super reach δ may not be provided.

Further, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, as effects that can be executed during the variable display, there are provided an advance notice effect that can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the ready-to-win state (or until the end timing of the variable display) and a cut-in effect that can be executed during the ready-to-win effect. Furthermore, the advance notice effect can be executed in any one of a plurality of effect patterns (pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-4) with different degrees of expectation for big hits. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when the variable display result is a big hit and the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4, which is a pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, when executing the notice effect, the effect pattern is determined from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 with a high degree of expectation for big win. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, when execution of the pattern CI-4 of the cut-in performance is decided, by executing the notice performance of the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2, attention can be paid to whether or not the result of the variable display becomes a big win until the end of the variable display, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 and 8-28, the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment enables the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display of 1 at a timing before the cut-in effect (during the period from the start of the variable display to the ready-to-win state), thereby preventing the player from recognizing that the variable display result is a big win from the timing before the cut-in effect is executed, thereby preventing the decrease in interest in the game. .

In addition, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which the notice effect can be executed at the timing before the cut-in effect during the variable display of 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notice effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect during the variable display executed before the variable display for executing the cut-in effect. Furthermore, the advance notice performance may be executed during the period from the start of the cut-in performance to the end of the ready-to-win performance, thereby preventing the player from recognizing that the variable display result will be a big hit during the period from the start of the cut-in performance to the end of the ready-to-win performance, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 and 8-26, when the variable display result is a big win, when the cut-in effect is executed according to the pattern CI-4, the big win type is always the big win C, while when the cut-in effect is executed according to the pattern CI-3, the big win type can be any of the big win A, the big win B, or the big win C. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the cut-in effect is executed according to the pattern CI-4 during the variable display. I can. Furthermore, when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3, there is a possibility that the big win A or B will be the big win type, so when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is lost, the player can be made to think that even if the game is a big win, it may have been the big win A or B, so that the decline in the interest in the game due to the loss of the variable display result can be reduced.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-30, any one of 4 to 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 (that is, when the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 and the variable display result may be lost), and the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3, which is a pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. Since the performance pattern is determined from (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2), it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit by executing the notice performance in the pattern YE-3 or YE-4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the variable display result from becoming a big win by executing the pattern CI-3 and the pattern YE-3 or YE-4 during the same variable display even though the variable display result does not become a big win.

In the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, any one of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko game machine 1, and the execution ratio of pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 is set to 0% as a form of limiting the execution of pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 of the notice effect when execution of pattern CI-3, which is a pattern CI-3, which is a pattern with high expectations for a big hit, is determined (prediction effect is pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko game machine 1, and when the cut-in performance is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3, which is a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, the notice performance may be executed in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4 at a lower rate than pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2. In other words, ``restricting the execution of the second predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed in a manner including the specific effect when the advantageous set value is set and the determining means has not determined to control the advantageous state'' in this claim includes not executing the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4, and executing the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4 at a lower rate than the case where the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2. morphology is also included.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-25, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variation pattern is the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), the set value is the same. If the value is the same, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the high-probability-high base state is set higher than the rate in which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the low-probability-low base state or the low-probability-high base state. Therefore, when the game state is the high-probability-high base state, the ratio of executing the cut-in performance in the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of super reach γ loss is higher than when the game state is the low-probability-low base state or the low-probability-high base state, so that the player can easily recognize that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 in the high-probability-high base state. After the player recognizes that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 by executing the cut-in performance in the pattern CI-3 in the high-probability-high base state, the player can easily continue the game even after the game state shifts to the low-probability-low base state, so that the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variable display is executed in the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), if the game state is the high-probability-high base state, the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than when the game state is the low-probability-low base state or the low-probability-high base state if the setting value is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variable display is executed in the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 when the game state is the high-probability-high base state, while the cut-in effect can not be executed in the pattern CI-3 when the game state is the low-probability-low base state or the low-probability-high base state. Good.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-39, the reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) is preferentially displayed on the image display device 5 over the announcement effect (image 245SG005s of character A, image 245SG005t of character B, image 245SG005u of character C, group image 245SG005v of characters A to C, and operation promotion image 245SG005H of push button 31B). Since the reel performance is easier for the player to visually recognize than the advance notice performance, the player can easily guess the set value set in the Pachinko game machine 1 from the pattern stopped and displayed as the performance result of the reel performance, and the game interest can be improved.

In this characterizing part 245SG, the symbol stopped and displayed as a result of the reel effect can suggest the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the setting suggestion in the present invention includes both suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 and suggesting that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 245SG, the form in which the execution period of the reel performance (setting suggestion performance) and the execution period of the advance notice performance partially overlap is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution period of the reel performance and the execution period of the advance notice performance may completely coincide.

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG, the reel effect (setting suggestive effect) is exemplified in a form in which the reel effect (setting suggesting effect) starts at a timing before the start timing of the notice effect and ends at a timing after the end timing of the notice effect during the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if at least a part of the executable period of the reel effect and the executable period of the notice effect overlap, for example, the reel effect may start from the timing after the start timing of the notice effect and end at the timing before the end timing of the notice effect. Good. Also, the reel effect may start at a timing after the start timing of the notice effect and end at a timing after the end timing of the notice effect. Also, the reel effect may be started at a timing before the start timing of the notice effect and ended at a timing after the end timing of the notice effect. Also, the reel effect may be started at a timing before the start timing of the notice effect and ended at a timing before the end timing of the notice effect. The reel performance may start at a timing before the announcement performance and end at a timing before the announcement performance.

In addition, in this characteristic part 245SG, a form in which the execution period of the reel performance (setting suggestion performance) and the execution period of the notice performance partially overlap is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution period of the reel performance and the execution period of the notice performance do not have to overlap.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 245SG, the image display is performed by drawing the reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) on a layer higher than the announcement effect (image 245SG005s of character A, image 245SG005t of character B, image 245SG005u of character C, group image 245SG005v of characters A to C, and operation promotion image 245SG005H of push button 31B). Although the form in which the visibility of the reel performance in the device 5 is made higher than the notice performance is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the visibility of the reel performance in the image display device 5 may be made higher than the notice performance by, for example, displaying the reel performance as an image relatively larger than the notice performance, setting the contrast of the reel performance higher than the notice performance, making the display time of the reel performance longer than the notice performance, or making the operation speed of the reel performance slower than the notice performance.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 245SG, the form in which the reel effect is executed by the operation of the stick controller 31A has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect may be executed according to the progress of the variable display regardless of whether or not the operation of the stick controller 31A is executed, like other effects such as the ready-to-win effect. In this case, as with the characterizing section 245SG, it is sufficient to decide to stop the "cherry" or "watermelon" symbols at a rate corresponding to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

Further, in the present characteristic portion 245SG, an example is shown in which, when the stick controller 31A is operated in advance at the start of the variable display, whether or not to execute the reel effect and the result of the effect are determined. By doing so, it is not necessary to determine whether or not to execute the reel performance and the performance result when the stick controller 31A is operated each time the variable display is started, so that the control load of the performance control CPU 120 can be reduced.

In addition, in this characteristic part 245SG, a form in which the reel performance can be executed in a period before the ready-to-win game is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel performance may be executed in a period in which the variable display is not executed during the big win game, etc., in addition to the execution of the variable display during the ready-to-win performance. When the reel performance can be executed in a period in which the variable display is not executed, the patterns to be stopped and displayed as the performance result of the reel performance may be determined from the patterns of "cherry" and "watermelon" suggesting the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 and the patterns of "bell" not suggesting anything.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-39, the image display device 5 can display an error notification image 245SG005J and a fourth symbol 245SG005F as game progress information display corresponding to the progress of the game. Since G005J is displayed preferentially, that is, the error notification image 245SG005J is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the reel image 245SG005G, the visibility of the error notification image 245SG005J can be ensured, and errors caused by obstruction of the display of the error notification image 245SG005J by the reel image 245SG005G can be prevented.

In this characteristic portion 245SG, the image display device 5 displays the error notification image 245SG005J and the fourth symbol 245SG005F as the game progress information display, but the present invention is not limited to this. Display other than the pattern 245SG005F may be included.

In addition, the image display device 5 can perform variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As shown in FIGS. Since the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with higher visibility than the decorative symbols, the visibility of the reel image 245SG005G in the symbol display area 5C can be ensured, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the image display device 5 can display the pending display in the first suspended memory display area 245SG005D and the second suspended memory display area 245SG005U as the effect related image related to the effect different from the reel effect and the advance notice effect. 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the reserved display, so that the visibility of the reel image 245SG005G in the first reserved memory display area 245SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 245SG005U can be ensured, so that the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 245SG, the pending display is exemplified as the effect-related image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect-related image may include, for example, a decorative image that is always displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-21, in the reel effect, it is possible to stop display the symbol "7" for notifying that the variable display result will be a big win as the effect result. You can improve your skill.

Further, in the reel performance, as performance results, a "bell" symbol that does not suggest the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, a "watermelon" symbol that suggests that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is a high set value, and a "cherry" symbol that suggests that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is a high set value at a higher rate than the "watermelon" symbol can be stopped and displayed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the type of the game and improve the amusement of the game.

8-37 and 8-38, the variable display of the characteristic portion 245SG can perform a notice effect in which an operation prompting image 245SG005H is displayed on the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B, and a reel effect in which the operation prompting image to prompt the player to operate the stick controller 31A is not displayed. , the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be suggested. As a result, the stick controller 31A is not operated by a player who is not interested in suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, so that the reel performance is not executed, while the reel performance is executed by operating the stick controller 31A by the player who is interested in suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, so that the performance matching the taste of the player can be executed.

Further, since the reel performance in the characteristic part 245SG can be executed only once during the variable display, it is prevented that the game player operates the stick controller 31A a plurality of times during one variable display to execute the reel performance a plurality of times, and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is excessively recognized by the player.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 245SG, a form in which the reel effect can be executed only once during one variable display is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel effect may be executed a plurality of times during one variable display. In addition, when the reel performance can be executed a plurality of times during the variable display of 1, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be prevented from being excessively recognized by the player by setting the ratio of stop display of the symbols of ``cherry'' and ``watermelon'' to be lower than the characteristic part 245SG.

Further, in this characteristic portion 245SG, the reel effect is executed by operating the stick controller 31A, and the advance notice effect is executed by operating the push button 31B. In other words, the reel performance and the advance notice performance are executed with the detection of the action of the player by different action detection means, respectively, so that the erroneous execution of the performance not desired by the player can be surely avoided and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, since the player can operate the stick controller 31A at a desired timing to execute the reel effect within the operation acceptance period of the stick controller 31A, the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 245SG, the reel effect is executed by operating the stick controller 31A, and the advance notice effect is executed by operating the push button 31B. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , a player's gesture, etc.) may be used to execute a reel effect or an advance notice effect.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a ball hitting operation handle 30 operated by a player or the like in order to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the hitting ball shooting device as game operation detection means, and a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B capable of detecting the operation of the player as effect operation detection means. The player can distinguish between the operation of the ball hitting operation handle 30 for progressing the game and the operation of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B for executing reel effects and advance notice effects.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (A), the execution period of the reel effect including the operation reception period of the stick controller 31A is set to 3 seconds to 3.5 seconds shorter than the shortened non-reach loss special figure fluctuation time of 3.75 seconds so that the reel effect can be executed even during the variable display of the shortened non-reach loss. Therefore, reel performance can be executed even when the player operates the stick controller 31A during the variable display of shortened non-reach out, so that the execution ratio of reel performance can be increased every time the variable display is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 245SG, a form in which the reel effect can be executed during the variable display of the shortened non-reach out is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel effect may be executed only during the variable display excluding the shortened non-reach out. By doing so, it is possible to execute the reel effect for a sufficient period of time for the player to recognize it, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention.

For example, in the characterizing part 245SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-25, when the variable display is executed with the variation pattern (PB1-5) which executes the resurrection effect, the cut-in effect can be executed with the pattern CI-3 at a lower rate than when the variable display is executed with the variable pattern (PA2-4 or PB1-4) which does not execute the resurrection effect. As shown in 2(A) to FIG. 8-42(E), when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect, the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3. In this way, when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the result of the variable display is informed that the result is a loss, the revival performance is executed and the result of the variable display is notified that the result is a big hit, although the player recognizes that any one of 4 to 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, thereby preventing the decrease in the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characterizing part 245SG of the above-described embodiment, when the variable display is executed with the variation pattern of the super ready-to-win γ jackpot that executes the resurrection production, the ratio of executing the cut-in production with the pattern CI-3 is set lower than in the case of executing the variable display with the variation pattern of the super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the restoration production. As shown in (D), when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super ready-to-win γ jackpot that executes the resurrection performance, the ratio of performing the cut-in performance in the pattern CI-3 may be set higher than in the case of executing the variable display in the variation pattern of the super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection performance. By doing so, for example, when the player places more importance on whether or not the variable display result is a big hit rather than whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, after the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is reported to be lost, the revival effect is further executed and the variable display result is reported to be a big win or not. You can improve your taste.

Further, in the characterizing section 245SG of the above-described embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, in the case of executing variable display in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) that executes the resurrection production, the cut-in production can be executed in the pattern CI-3. As shown in C), when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the cut-in performance can be executed in pattern CI-3 when variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the revival performance, while when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the revival performance. The cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3 when the variable display is executed. In this manner, when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PB1-5) of the super ready-to-win γ jackpot for executing the resurrection performance, it is decided that the variable display result is a big win and that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and after it is once reported that the variable display result is lost during the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win γ during the variable display, it is determined whether the resurrection performance is executed and the variable display result to be a big win is reported. It is possible to draw the player's attention and improve the amusement of the game.

That is, in the characteristic part 245SG, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win γ, it is possible to encourage the player to continue the game by confirming that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 even if the variable display result is lost. When the pachinko game machine 1 is hit, the variable display result becomes a big win, and furthermore, by determining that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game.

In addition, in the characterizing part 245SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variable display is executed in the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2, which are the effect patterns with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, and the cut-in effect is an effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 8-45 (A) to 8-45 (C), the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the super reach γ is variably displayed with a variation pattern (PA2-4). is executed, if the cut-in performance is decided to be executed in pattern CI-3, which is a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for big win, the notice performance can be executed in pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than when the cut-in performance is decided to be executed in pattern CI-1 or CI-2, which is a performance pattern with low expectation for big win. By doing this, when cut -in production is executed in pattern CI -3 during the reach of Super Reach γ, the variable display result is that the resulting production is executed in pattern YE -3 when the cut -in production is executed in pattern CI -1 or pattern CI -2 in pattern YE -3. Because it can prevent it from being recognized in advance, it is possible to pay attention to the players for whether or not the variable display result is a big hit, and the play is improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 (C) to 8-25 (E), when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and when the variable display is executed in the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), if the game state is a high probability high base state, If the setting value is the same value, the game state is a low probability low base state or a low probability high base state Although a form in which the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than in the case has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. is the same value, the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than when the gaming state is the high-probability-high base state.

In this way, when the game state is the low-probability-low base state or the low-probability-high base state, the cut-in effect is likely to be executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ at a higher rate than when the game state is the high-probability-high base state. is executed in the pattern CI-3, that is, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, so that the player's willingness to continue the game can be improved, so that the game interest in the low-probability-low base state and the low-probability-high base state can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 245SG-5, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PA2-4) of super reach γ deviation, if the game state is the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state, the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than when the game state is the high probability high base state if the set value is the same. , The present invention is not limited to this, as shown in FIG. 8-47 as a modification 245SG-6, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and when the variable display is executed in the super reach γ deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-4), the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 when the game state is the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state, while the game state is the high probability high base state. , the cut-in effect may be disabled in pattern CI-3. By doing so, the cut-in performance can be executed in the pattern CI-3 during the ready-to-win performance of the super reach γ only when the game state is the low-probability-low base state or the low-probability-high base state, so that the low-probability-high base state or the low-probability-high base state can attract the player's attention to the low-probability-high base state or the low-probability-high base state in which the variable display result is less likely to result in a big win than in the high-probability-high base state.

Further, in the characterizing part 245SG of the above-described embodiment, an example is given in which the cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIGS. A set value suggestion effect that suggests a value may be made executable. When the set value suggestion performance can be executed during the ready-to-win performance of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, the above-mentioned advance notice performance can be executed in a period (for example, a period from the start of the variable display to the ready-to-win state) before the period during which the set value suggestion performance can be executed (during the ready-to-win performance), and the execution ratio of the set value suggestion performance may be made different according to the performance pattern of the notice performance.

Specifically, when the advance notice performance is executed in the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, the set value suggestion performance can be executed at a higher rate than in the case where the notice performance is executed in the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. In this way, the player can be made to pay attention to which performance pattern the advance notice performance is executed, and when the advance notice performance is executed in the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the set value suggesting performance is executed during the ready-to-win performance, thereby preventing the player from overlooking the set value suggesting performance.

Further, in the characterizing part 245SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-39, when both the reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) and the notice effect (image 245SG005s of character A, image 245SG005t of character B, image 245SG005u of character C, group image 245SG005v of characters A to C) are executed during variable display, the reel effect is superior to the notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 8-49(A) to 8-49(E) as modification 245SG-8, for example, when both the reel effect and the advance notice effect are executed during the variable display, the reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) is displayed in the lower right part of the image display device 5, and the notice effect (character A image 245SG005s, character The image 245SG005t of B, the image 245SG005u of character C, and the collective image 245SG005v of characters A to C) may be displayed above the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the reel performance, that is, the reel performance and the advance notice performance may be displayed in different display areas of the image display device 5.

By doing so, the visibility of the images of both the reel effect and the notice effect is ensured, so that it is possible to prevent the effect of one of the reel effect and the notice effect from deteriorating.

In this modification 245SG-8, the reel effect and the notice effect are displayed in different display areas in the image display device 5, thereby preventing the effect of either the reel effect or the notice effect from being lowered. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By displaying the performance and the advance notice performance on the other hand, the visibility of the images of both the reel performance and the notice performance may be ensured, and the deterioration of the performance effect of either the reel performance or the notice performance may be prevented.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 245SG of the above-described embodiment, when both the reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) and the notice effect (image 245SG005s of character A, image 245SG005t of character B, image 245SG005u of character C, group image 245SG005v of characters A to C) are executed during variable display, the effect pattern of the notice effect (displayed on the image display device 5 as the notice effect However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when both the reel performance and the notice performance are executed during the variable display, whether or not the reel performance is displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the notice performance may be changed according to the image displayed on the image display device 5 as the notice performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-50(A) to 8-50(E) as a modified example 245SG-9, when it is determined to display an image 245SG005s of a character A with a low expectation of a big hit as reel effects and a notice effect during variable display (pattern YE-1), the reel effects are displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the notice effect, and characters A to C with high expectations of a big win are displayed on the image display device 5 as the reel effects and the notice effect during the variable display. (pattern YE-4), the display areas of the reel effects and the advance notice effects on the image display device 5 are made different as shown in FIG. 8-49 as a modified example 245SG-8.

By doing so, the visibility of the reel performance can be ensured, and when an image with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, a group image 245SG005v of characters A to C) is displayed on the image display device 5 as the notice performance, the visibility of the notice performance can be secured in addition to the reel performance, so that the player's attention can be made to the high ratio of the stop pattern displayed as the reel performance and the variable display result to the big win, and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 245SG of the above-described embodiment, when the reel effect is executed, the variable display result is a jackpot by stop-displaying the "7" symbol as the effect result of the reel effect.

In such a case, for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-51(A) to 8-51(D) as a modified example 245SG-10, when the variable display result is a big hit and the jackpot type is a jackpot A (non-probable variable big hit), the white "7" symbol can be stopped and displayed as a result of the reel effect, while the variable display result is a big win and the big win type is a big win B or C (variable big win). ), a black “7” symbol may be stop-displayed as a reel effect effect result. In this way, when the '7' pattern for notifying that the variable display result will be a big hit as the performance result of the reel performance is stopped and displayed, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode of the stopped and displayed '7' pattern, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing section 245SG of the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which images of characters are displayed on the image display device 5 as an advance notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as the notice effect, an effect different from the characterizing portion 245SG such as a group effect in which a plurality of characters cross the display area of the image display device 5 may be executed. In particular, when the group effect can be executed as the advance notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 8-52(A) to 8-52(C) as the modified example 245SG-11, as the group effect, the reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) may be displayed by being superimposed on the character crossing the display area of the image display device 5 in the left direction. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a character crossing the display area of the image display device 5 in the left direction from lowering the visibility of the reel effect.

Further, in the characterizing part 245SG of the above-described embodiment, the reel effect is executed by operating the stick controller 31A, and the advance notice effect is executed by operating the push button 31B. In other words, the reel effect and the notice effect are different from each other. Incidentally, when the reel effect and the advance notice effect are executed in response to the detection of the action of the player by the same action detection means, as shown in the characteristic portion 245SG, the effect executable period of the reel effect and the effect executable period of the notice effect do not partially overlap during the variable display of 1 (see FIGS. 8-31 to 8-34). The performance executable period and the performance executable period of the advance notice performance may not overlap at all. By doing so, it is possible to avoid execution of a performance that the player does not desire, out of the reel performance and the advance notice performance, by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, so that the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 245SG of the above-described embodiment, the reel effect start timing and the notice effect start timing are exemplified as different forms, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by setting the operation reception period of the stick controller 31A for executing the reel effect and the operation reception period of the push button 31B for executing the notice effect to be the same period, the reel effect and the notice effect may be executed from the same timing.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 245SG of the above-described embodiment, an example is given in which the effect control CPU 120 can determine whether or not to execute the reel effect at the start of the variable display. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-54 (A) and 8-54 (B) as a modification 245SG-13, in a state in which a game is not being executed (when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is not being executed, no pending memory exists, and the game state is neither a big win game state nor a small win game state), the player operates the push button 31B to display the effect mode change screen on the image display device 5, and the effect mode change screen is displayed. It is sufficient that the effect mode can be selected (changed) from the first effect mode and the second effect mode by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A while the change screen is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-54(C), when the first effect mode is selected, execution of the reel effect can be determined at the start of the variable display at a higher rate than when the second effect mode is selected.

In this modification 245SG-13, a first effect mode and a second effect mode with different reel effect execution ratios are provided, and a player can select the first effect mode and the second effect mode (change the effect mode).

Further, in the modification 245SG-13, a form in which the player can change the effect mode is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by providing an effect mode change switch for changing the effect mode to a position where it becomes operable by opening the gaming machine frame 245SG003, the effect mode may be changed by a game hall employee or the like, while the player cannot change the effect mode. Furthermore, whether or not the player can change the presentation mode, and whether or not the player can change the presentation mode, can be set by an employee of the game arcade or the like.

In addition, in the characterizing part 245SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which one of the cut-in images can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a cut-in effect during the execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach γ was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. 005y) can be displayed.

In addition, in this way, when any of the cut-in images can be displayed in a display area different from the reel effect (245SG005G) in the image display device 5, as shown in FIGS. Any one of the images 245SG005r) can be displayed, and depending on which cut-in image is displayed on the image display device 5, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-55 (E), when any value of 1 to 3 is set as the setting value in the pachinko machine 1, pattern CI-3 (display of cut-in image 245SG005y) is determined as a cut-in effect at a higher rate than pattern CI-5 (display of cut-in image 245SG005r). As a cut-in effect, pattern CI-5 (display of cut-in image 245SG005r) may be determined at a higher rate than pattern CI-3 (display of cut-in image 245SG005y).

In the characteristic part 245SG, the cut-in effect can be executed only during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach γ, so that the ratio (execution frequency) of pattern CI-3 and pattern CI-5 as the cut-in effect can be made different from the ratio of stop-display of the symbols of "cherry" and "watermelon" as the effect result of the reel effect. As described above, the rate of execution of cut-in performance in patterns CI-3 and CI-5 is different from the rate of stopping and displaying the patterns of 'cherry' and 'watermelon' as the performance result of reel performance, so that the player can easily guess the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 by the cut-in performance and the reel performance, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In this modified example 245SG-14, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-5 differs from the rate at which the symbol "cherry" or "watermelon" is stop-displayed as the effect result of the reel effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The rate at which the "cherry" and "watermelon" symbols are stopped and displayed may be different.

By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to guess the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 by the cut-in performance and the reel performance, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing part 245SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

In addition, although a plurality of characteristic portions and modifications are disclosed in this specification, the game machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining two or more characteristic portions and modifications from the plurality of characteristic portions and modifications.

(Description of Invention 245SG)
This case includes invention 245SG shown below.

Conventionally, in a game machine capable of setting a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for a player, there is one that displays a setting suggestion effect that displays characters such as giraffes, elephants, lions, etc. that suggest the set value at the time of change (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902).

However, there is a problem that effects other than setting suggesting effects are not taken into consideration, and the setting suggesting effects may not sufficiently improve the game interest. In order to solve such problems, Invention 245SG is configured as follows.

The game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player and that can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) with different advantages for the player,
a display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an image display device 5);
A notice effect of displaying on the display means a specific image (for example, an image 245SG005s of character A, an image 245SG005t of character B, an image 245SG005u of character C, and a group image 245SG005v of characters A to C) suggesting that the control is to be in the advantageous state, and a reel image 24 that is an image different from the specific image and is related to setting suggestion (for example, a symbol of "cherry" or "watermelon" is stopped and displayed. 5SG005G) on the display means (for example, effect execution means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display));
with
When the advance notice effect and the setting-suggesting effect are executed in parallel, the setting-suggesting image is displayed with higher visibility than the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. are also given priority)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the setting suggestion image is easier to visually recognize than the specific image, it is easier for the player to guess the setting suggestion, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The display means is capable of displaying game progress information display (for example, the fourth symbol 245SG005F and the error notification image 245SG005J) corresponding to the progress of the game,
When the game progress information display and the setting suggesting image are displayed simultaneously on the display means, the game progress information display is displayed with higher visibility than the setting suggesting image (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that is displayed with priority over G005G)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the visibility of the game progress information display can be ensured, misrecognition of the game progress information display can be prevented.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display in specific display areas of the display means (for example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R),
When the setting suggesting image is displayed in the specific display area, the setting suggesting image is displayed with higher visibility than the variable display image variably displayed in the specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-39B, when the reel image 245SG005G is displayed overlapping the symbol display area 5C in the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5C).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the setting suggesting image in the specific display area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The display means has an effect-related image display area (for example, a first pending memory display area 245SG005D and a second pending memory display area 245SG005U) capable of displaying at least a performance-related image (for example, a pending display) related to a performance different from the advance notice effect and the set suggestion effect,
When the setting suggestive images are displayed in the effect-related image display area overlappingly, the setting suggestive image is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the effect-related image displayed in the effect-related image display area (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that is displayed with priority over G005D)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the setting suggesting image in the effect-related image display area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The effect executing means can display, as the specific images, a first specific image (for example, an image 245SG005s of character A indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is low) and a second specific image (for example, a group image 245SG005v of characters A to C indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high) on the display means,
When the first specific image and the setting suggesting image are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the setting suggesting image is displayed with higher visibility than the first specific image. The part that is displayed with priority over s),
When the second specific image and the setting suggesting image are displayed on the display means at the same time, the second specific image and the setting suggesting image are displayed in different display areas (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the collective image 245SG005v of the characters A to C is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the setting suggesting image can be ensured, and when the second specific image is displayed, the second specific image can also be visually recognized, so that the amusement of the game can be improved by the performance of both the advance notice performance and the setting suggesting performance.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The effect executing means can display a special setting suggesting image corresponding to the control of the advantageous state on the display means in the setting suggesting effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37(E), a portion in which a "7" symbol indicating that the variable display result is a big hit in the reel effect can be stopped and displayed).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the attention to the setting suggesting effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to means 6,
As the advantageous states, there are a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot B or jackpot C) more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
The effect executing means can display a special setting suggesting image corresponding to the second advantageous state as the special setting suggesting image on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-51(C) and 8-51(D) as the modified example 245SG-10, when the variable display result is a big win and the big win type is a big win A, the white symbol "7" can be stopped and displayed as a reel effect, and the variable display result is a big win. If the type is jackpot B or jackpot C, the black "7" pattern can be stopped and displayed as a reel effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further increase the attention to the setting suggesting effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
The effect executing means is capable of displaying a non-suggestive image (for example, a "bell" pattern) that does not serve as the setting suggestion, and as the setting suggesting image, a first setting suggesting image (for example, a "watermelon" pattern) and a second setting suggesting image (for example, a "cherry" pattern) that suggests that a setting value more advantageous to the player than the first setting suggesting image is set.
According to this feature, since it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of image displayed in the setting suggesting effect, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8,
The production executing means is
As the advance notice effect, a effect in which the specific image is in a predetermined action state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-52(C) as modification 245SG-11, a group effect in which a plurality of characters cross the display area of the image display device 5 from right to left) can be executed,
The setting suggesting image can be superimposed and displayed on the specific image in the predetermined operating state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-52(C) as modification 245SG-11, the portion where the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the group effect in the image display device 5).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the setting suggestion image from deteriorating due to the specific image being in a predetermined operating state.

The gaming machine of means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 9,
Equipped with motion detection means (for example, stick controller 31A and push button 31B) capable of detecting a predetermined motion of the player,
The production executing means is
An action-promoting notification effect prompting execution of the predetermined action (for example, a portion that displays an operation-promoting image 245SG005H on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-38(B)) can be executed,
As the notice effect, the specific image can be displayed on the basis of the detection of the predetermined action by the action detection means, accompanied by the execution of the action promotion notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-38, the notice effect is an image 245SG005s of the character A, an image 245SG005t of the character B, and an image 245SG005t of the character B when the player operates the push button 31B after the operation promotion image 245SG005H is displayed on the image display device 5. image 245SG005u, the part where any of the group image 245SG005v of characters A to C is displayed),
As the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion image can be displayed based on the detection of the predetermined action by the action detection means without execution of the action promotion notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37, the reel effect is such that the operation prompt image 245SG005H is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the player operates the stick controller 31A to change the reel image 245SG005G to "cherry", "watermelon", "7", " The part where one of the patterns of "Gekiatsu", "Chance", and "Bell" is displayed stopped)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the setting suggestion performance in which the suggestion by the setting suggestion image is performed is not accompanied by the action promoting notification performance, so that the setting suggestion performance is not executed for the player who is not interested in the suggestion regarding the setting suggestion, while the setting suggestion performance can be executed for the player who is interested in the suggestion regarding the setting suggestion, so that the performance matching the taste of the player can be executed.

(Description of Invention 246SG)
In addition, this case includes invention 246SG shown below.

Conventionally, in a game machine capable of setting a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for a player, there is one that displays a setting suggestion effect that displays characters such as giraffes, elephants, lions, etc. that suggest the set value at the time of change (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902).

However, there is a problem that effects other than setting suggesting effects are not taken into consideration, and the setting suggesting effects may not sufficiently improve the game interest. In order to solve such problems, Invention 246SG is configured as follows.

The game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player, and that can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player,
a display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an image display device 5);
A notice effect of displaying on the display means a specific image (for example, the image 245SG005s of the character A, the image 245SG005t of the character B, the image 245SG005u of the character C, and the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C) suggesting the control to the advantageous state; 45SG005G) on the display means and effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display);
with
When the forewarning effect and the setting suggesting effect are executed in parallel, the specific image and the setting suggesting image are displayed in different display areas (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49 as the modification 245SG-8, when the reel image 245SG005G and the set image 245SG005v of the characters A to C are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, and the character The part where the collective image 245SG005v of A to C is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since visual recognition of both the specific image and the setting suggesting image is ensured, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of either the advance notice performance or the setting suggesting performance from deteriorating, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The display means is capable of displaying game progress information display (for example, the fourth symbol 245SG005F and the error notification image 245SG005J) corresponding to the progress of the game,
When the game progress information display and the setting suggesting image are displayed simultaneously on the display means, the game progress information display is displayed with higher visibility than the setting suggesting image (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that is displayed with priority over G005G)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the visibility of the game progress information display can be ensured, misrecognition of the game progress information display can be prevented.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display in specific display areas of the display means (for example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R),
When the setting suggesting image is displayed in the specific display area, the setting suggesting image is displayed with higher visibility than the variable display image variably displayed in the specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-39B, when the reel image 245SG005G is displayed overlapping the symbol display area 5C in the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5C).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the setting suggesting image in the specific display area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The display means has an effect-related image display area (for example, a first pending memory display area 245SG005D and a second pending memory display area 245SG005U) capable of displaying at least a performance-related image (for example, a pending display) related to a performance different from the advance notice effect and the set suggestion effect,
When the setting suggestive images are displayed in the effect-related image display area overlappingly, the setting suggestive image is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the effect-related image displayed in the effect-related image display area (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that is displayed with priority over G005D)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the setting suggesting image in the effect-related image display area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The effect executing means can display, as the specific images, a first specific image (for example, an image 245SG005s of character A indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is low) and a second specific image (for example, a group image 245SG005v of characters A to C indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high) on the display means,
When the first specific image and the setting suggesting image are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the setting suggesting image is displayed with higher visibility than the first specific image. The part that is displayed with priority over s),
When the second specific image and the setting suggesting image are displayed on the display means at the same time, the second specific image and the setting suggesting image are displayed in different display areas (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the collective image 245SG005v of the characters A to C is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the setting suggesting image can be ensured, and when the second specific image is displayed, the second specific image can also be visually recognized, so that the amusement of the game can be improved by the performance of both the advance notice performance and the setting suggesting performance.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The effect executing means can display a special setting suggesting image corresponding to the control of the advantageous state on the display means in the setting suggesting effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37(E), a portion in which a "7" symbol indicating that the variable display result is a big hit in the reel effect can be stopped and displayed).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the attention to the setting suggesting effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to means 6,
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
The effect executing means can display, as the special setting suggesting image, a special setting suggesting image corresponding to the second advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot B or jackpot C) on the display means. A part that can be stopped and displayed, and if the variable display result is a big win and the big win type is a big win B or a big win C, black "7" symbols can be stopped and displayed as a reel effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further increase the attention to the setting suggesting effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
The effect executing means is capable of displaying a non-suggestive image (for example, a "bell" pattern) that does not serve as the setting suggestion, and as the setting suggesting image, a first setting suggesting image (for example, a "watermelon" pattern) and a second setting suggesting image (for example, a "cherry" pattern) that suggests that a setting value more advantageous to the player than the first setting suggesting image is set.
According to this feature, since it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of image displayed in the setting suggesting effect, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8,
The production executing means is
As the advance notice effect, a effect in which the specific image is in a predetermined action state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-52(C) as modification 245SG-11, a group effect in which a plurality of characters cross the display area of the image display device 5 from right to left) can be executed,
The setting suggesting image can be superimposed and displayed on the specific image in the predetermined operating state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-52(C) as modification 245SG-11, the portion where the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the group effect in the image display device 5).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the setting suggestion image from deteriorating due to the specific image being in a predetermined operating state.

The gaming machine of means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 9,
Equipped with motion detection means (for example, stick controller 31A and push button 31B) capable of detecting a predetermined motion of the player,
The production executing means is
An action-promoting notification effect prompting execution of the predetermined action (for example, a portion that displays an operation-promoting image 245SG005H on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-38(B)) can be executed,
As the notice effect, the specific image can be displayed on the basis of the detection of the predetermined action by the action detection means, accompanied by the execution of the action promotion notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-38, the notice effect is an image 245SG005s of the character A, an image 245SG005t of the character B, and an image 245SG005t of the character B when the player operates the push button 31B after the operation promotion image 245SG005H is displayed on the image display device 5. image 245SG005u, the part where any of the group image 245SG005v of characters A to C is displayed),
As the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion image can be displayed based on the detection of the predetermined action by the action detection means without execution of the action promotion notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37, the reel effect is such that the operation prompt image 245SG005H is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the player operates the stick controller 31A to change the reel image 245SG005G to "cherry", "watermelon", "7", " The part where one of the patterns of "Gekiatsu", "Chance", and "Bell" is displayed stopped)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the setting suggesting performance in which the suggestion by the setting suggesting image is performed is not accompanied by the action promotion notification performance, so that the setting suggesting performance is not executed for the player who is not interested in the setting suggesting, while the setting suggesting performance can be executed for the player who is interested in the setting suggesting, so that the performance matching the taste of the player can be executed.

(Description of Invention 257SG)
In addition, this case includes invention 257SG shown below.

Conventionally, in a game machine capable of setting a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for a player, there is one that displays a setting suggestion effect that displays characters such as giraffes, elephants, lions, etc. that suggest the set value at the time of change (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902).

However, there is a problem that effects other than setting suggesting effects are not taken into consideration, and the setting suggesting effects may not sufficiently improve the game interest. In order to solve such problems, Invention 257SG is configured as follows.

The game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player and that can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) with different advantages for the player,
a display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an image display device 5);
action detection means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, and ball hitting operation handle 30) capable of detecting a predetermined action of the player;
Effect executing means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display) capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a specific image on the display means based on the detection of the predetermined action by the action detecting means;
with
The specific effects include a first specific effect (e.g., advance notice effect) accompanied by execution of the action promotion notification effect, and a second specific effect (e.g., reel effect) not accompanied by execution of the action promotion notification effect,
The specific image displayed in the second specific effect includes a setting suggestion image that makes a suggestion related to the setting suggestion (for example, in the reel effect, a part that suggests the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 by stopping and displaying the symbol of "cherry" or "watermelon" on the reel image 245SG005G).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the second specific performance in which the suggestion by the setting suggestion image is performed is not accompanied by the action promotion notification performance, so that the second specific performance is not executed for the player who is not interested in the setting suggestion, while the second specific performance can be executed for the player who is interested in the setting suggestion, so that the performance matching the taste of the player can be executed.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
When the specific image displayed in the first specific effect and the specific image displayed in the second specific effect are displayed at the same time, the specific image displayed in the second specific effect is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the specific image displayed in the first specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. , the part where the reel is displayed with priority over the image 245SG005G and the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific image displayed in the second specific performance is easier to visually recognize than the specific image displayed in the first specific performance, so that the player can easily guess the setting suggestion and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
When the specific image displayed in the first specific effect and the specific image displayed in the second specific effect are displayed at the same time, the specific image displayed in the first specific effect and the specific image displayed in the second specific effect are displayed in different display areas (for example, as shown in FIG. When displayed simultaneously, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, and the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C is displayed in the upper portion of the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the visibility of both the specific image displayed in the first specific performance and the specific image displayed in the second specific performance can be ensured, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of either the first specific performance or the second specific performance from deteriorating, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The effect execution means executes the second specific effect in an execution period different from the execution period of the first specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-53 as modification 245SG-12, a portion in which the reel effect and the advance notice effect are executed in different periods).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to avoid the erroneous execution of the specific effect that the player does not want out of the first specific effect and the second specific effect by the player's predetermined action, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The motion detection means includes first motion detection means (e.g., push button 31B) capable of detecting the predetermined motion, and second motion detection means (e.g., stick controller 31A) capable of detecting the predetermined motion and different from the first motion detection means,
The procedure of the production execution can be executed in the first specific production based on the detection of the specified operation by the first operation detection means, and the second specific effects can be executed based on the detection of the specified operation by the second operation detection means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-31 to 8-34, the production control. The CPU120 can execute the notice production based on the operation of the push button 31b, and the reel production can be executed based on the operation of the stick controller 31a).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the motion detecting means for detecting the predetermined motion of the player is different between the first specified performance and the second specified performance, the erroneous execution of the specified performance that the player does not want among the first specified performance and the second specified performance can be surely avoided and the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The action detection means includes a game operation detection means (for example, the batting operation handle 30) capable of detecting an operation based on the progress of the game, and an effect operation detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B) capable of detecting an operation based on the effect,
The first specific effect and the second specific effect are effects executed based on the detection of the predetermined action of the player by the effect operation detection means (for example, the reel effect and the notice effect are effects executed based on the player's operation of the stick controller, roller 31A, or push button 31B).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it can be distinguished from actions related to the progress of the game.

The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
A variable display means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol variation process) capable of executing variable display and performing normal variable display with a variable display period of a predetermined period (for example, non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variable display) and shortened variable display with a variable display period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, shortened non-reach variable display);
each time the variable display is executed, determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the second specific effect when the predetermined motion is detected by the motion detection means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes reel effect determination processing shown in FIG. 8-20);
with
The effect period of the second specific effect is a period corresponding to the variable display period of the shortened variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-31, the execution period of the reel effect including the operation acceptance period of the stick controller 31A is a portion shorter than the non-reach-out special figure fluctuation time).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the second specific performance can be executed even when the motion detection means detects the predetermined motion of the player during the shortened variable display, so that the execution ratio of the second specific performance can be increased for each execution of the variable display.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
Execution frequency change means is provided so that the player can change the execution frequency of the second specific effect by the effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-54 as modification 245SG-13, the effect mode can be selected by the player's operation between the first effect mode and the second effect mode in which the reel effect execution determination ratio is different).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the player can adjust the execution frequency of the second specific effect to a desired frequency, the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a suggestive effect that is different from the second specific effect and performs the setting suggestion in a display area different from the display area in which the setting suggesting image is displayed in the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-55 as a modification 245SG-14, a cut-in effect can be executed in the upper part of the image display device 5 with pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-5).
At least one of the reliability and the execution frequency of the suggestive effect is different from the second specific effect (for example, the portion where the ratio of executing pattern CI-3 and pattern CI-5 as the cut-in effect is different from the ratio of the stop display of the symbol "cherry" and "watermelon" as the effect result of the reel effect).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the suggestion effect and the second specific effect make it easier for the player to guess the setting suggestion, so that the game interest can be improved.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also includes a gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (eg, 1 to 6) that differ in the degree of advantage for the player. 005s, an image 245SG005t of character B, an image 245SG005u of character C, and a group image 245SG005v of characters A to C) on the display means, and a setting suggestion effect of displaying on the display means a setting suggestion image (for example, a reel image 245SG005G in which a pattern of "cherry" or "watermelon" is stopped and displayed) that is different from the specific image and is related to setting suggestion. means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect process during variable display), and when the forewarning effect and the setting suggesting effect are executed in parallel, the specific image and the setting suggesting image are displayed in different display areas (for example, as shown in FIG. is a portion where a reel image 245SG005G is displayed at the lower right portion of the image display device 5, and a collective image 245SG005v of characters A to C is displayed at the upper portion of the image display device 5); When the game progress information display is displayed on the means at the same time, the game progress information display is displayed with higher visibility than the setting suggestion image (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (F), when the reel image 245SG005G and the error notification image 245SG005J are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the error notification image 245SG005J is displayed with priority over the reel image 245SG005G), and further, Suggestion effect executing means capable of executing an advantageous suggesting effect (e.g., pending display forewarning effect, timer effect, chance eye effect, etc.) suggesting control to the advantageous state; and preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (e.g., pending display forewarning preparation effect, timer preparation effect, etc.) for foretelling that the advantageous suggesting effect will be executed before the advantageous suggesting effect is executed, wherein the advantageous suggesting effect comprises a first suggesting effect (e.g., pending display forewarning effect) and a second suggesting effect (e.g., timer effect) different from the first suggesting effect. ) and a third suggesting effect (e.g., a second chance notice effect) different from the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect, wherein the preparation effect includes a first preparation effect (e.g., pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggesting effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect (e.g., timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggesting effect will be executed, and the third suggesting effect, the first preparatory effect, and the second preparatory effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (Fig. 10-11 (A1) and (A2)), the third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed (for example, see FIGS. 10-10).

According to such a configuration, since visual recognition of both the specific image and the setting suggesting image is ensured, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of either the advance notice performance or the setting suggesting performance from deteriorating, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, since the visibility of the game progress information display can be ensured, misrecognition of the game progress information display can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

In addition to the display of the setting suggesting image, the setting value may be suggested depending on the type of the mode of the advantageous suggesting effect or the preparation effect. For example, a plurality of modes of the first, second, and third suggesting effects and the first and second preparatory effects are prepared, and the modes of the advantageous suggesting effects and the preparatory effects are selected from a plurality of types by a lottery or the like for each timing when the advantageous suggesting effects and the preparatory effects can be executed, and the selection ratios of the modes of the first, second, and third suggesting effects and the first and second preparatory effects are varied according to the set values, so that the set values are more advantageous to the player, the first, second, and third modes are selected. The suggestive effect and the first and second preparation effects may be made easier to be executed in a specific type of mode. In this way, the types of modes of advantageous suggesting performances and preparation performances are further enriched, and when the advantageous suggesting performances and preparation performances of specific types of modes are executed, the player's expectation that the set values are advantageous to the player is improved, so that the interest in the game can be improved.
Further, if setting values are suggested by a plurality of elements (for example, display of a setting suggestion image and types of advantageous suggesting effects and preparation effects), when setting values advantageous to the player are suggested by a plurality of factors, the player can be more confident that the setting values are advantageous to the player. Since it is possible to maintain the expectation that the setting value is appropriate, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of preventing the effect of either one of the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect from being lowered and also favorably maintaining interest, the game machine is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player, and a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing an advantageous suggestive effect (such as a hold display advance notice effect, a timer effect, a chance advance notice effect, etc.) suggesting that the player is controlled to the advantageous state, and an advantageous suggestion before the advantageous suggestive effect is executed. A preparation performance execution means capable of executing a preparation performance (for example, a suspension display notice preparation performance, a timer preparation performance, etc.) for announcing the execution of the performance is provided, the advantageous suggestion performance includes a first suggestion performance (for example, a suspension display notice preparation performance), a second suggestion performance (for example, a timer performance) different from the first suggestion performance, and a third suggestion performance (for example, a chance notice performance) different from the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance, and the preparation performance is a first preparation performance for notifying that the first suggestion performance will be executed. (For example, pending display notice preparation effect) and a second preparation effect (for example, timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed. 3 A game machine in which suggestive effects are likely to be executed (for example, see FIG. 10-10). An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 153SG)
Next, the game machine in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-31.

First, FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-3, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 153SG001a formed in the shape of a vertically elongated rectangular frame, a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface, and a game machine frame (underframe) 153SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. In the game machine frame 153SG003, a glass door frame 153SG003a having a glass window is provided so as to be rotatable about the left side between a door open position where the front surface of the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front surface is closed. It is designed to be able to see through the skill area.

The game machine frame 153SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it.

The left game area 153SG002L is a game area in which a game ball hit relatively weakly (left-handed) by operating the ball operating handle 30 flows down. It is a game area that flows down through 2C.

In addition, the left game area 153SG002L is provided with a general prize winning port 10, and the right game area 153SG002R is provided with a passing gate 41, a variable prize winning ball device 6B, a general prize winning port 10 and a special variable prize winning ball device 7 from upstream to downstream of the right game region 153SG002R. That is, a game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L can enter the first start winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and a game ball flowing down the right gaming area 153SG002R can enter the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, and the passage gate 4. 1 can be passed.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 153SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 153SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening.

In addition, a first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 153SG005U are set on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . In the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, a reserved memory display for identifiably displaying the reserved memory number (special figure reserved memory number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3, the main board 11 in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment is housed in a board case 153SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. In addition, the main board 11 is provided with a lock switch 153SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, a setting switch 153SG052 functioning as a setting switch for changing setting values such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the setting value change state, and an open sensor 153SG090 for detecting opening of the game machine frame 153SG003. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment is also a state in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by a store clerk or the like (setting value confirmation state).

A setting switching main body provided with an operating portion such as the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 that can be operated by the player is accommodated in the board case 153SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 are formed on the back surface of the board case 153SG201 so that they can be operated without opening the board case 153SG201. It is exposed on the rear side through an opening.

Since the substrate case 153SG201 having the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 153SG003 is closed. Further, since the lock switch 153SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 153SG051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later, by means of a setting key. In the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 153SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 153SG201. The display monitor 153SG029 is connected to the main substrate 11 and arranged above the substrate case 153SG201. That is, the display monitor 153SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 153SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the frame 153SG003 for the game machine is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the frame 153SG003 for the game machine opened, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a first special symbol display device 153SG004A capable of executing variable display of the first special symbol, a second special symbol display device 153SG004B capable of variable display of the second special symbol, and a first reservation capable of displaying the number of first reserved memories. Display device 153SG025A, second reservation display device 153SG025B capable of displaying second reservation memory number, normal design display device 153SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display device 153SG025C capable of displaying normal design reservation memory number, round display device 153SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, high base state (time reduction) A game information display unit 153SG200 is provided in which a right hitting lamp 153SG132 that lights in a game state in which a game ball is hit toward the right game area 153SG002R, such as a state) or a jackpot game state, a probability variable lamp 153SG133 that lights in a probability variable state, and a time reduction lamp 153SG134 that lights in a high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. Further, in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination.

In the variable display of the first special symbol, when the variable display result becomes a big win, the first special symbol display device 153SG004A can display the variable display result and the derivation display with two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. In addition, when the variable display result becomes a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 153SG004B can display the variable display result and derivation with two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, but the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 153SG004B overlap at least a part. You may have

The first suspension display 153SG025A and the second suspension display 153SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. In the first suspension display 153SG025A and the second suspension display 153SG025B, if the number of suspension memories is one, only the LED at the left end lights up, and as the number of suspension memories increases, the second LED from the left, the third from the left, and the fourth LED from the left sequentially light up. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED in the reserve display corresponding to the variable display decreases (is consumed), and is turned off in a predetermined shift direction (toward the left in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment).

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure reservation memory is preferentially executed. For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 153SG025A is lit, and the left two LEDs of the second pending indicator 153SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, it is variable based on the first special figure pending memory. display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 153SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, display control commands used to control image display operations in the image display device 5, audio control commands used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and LED control commands used to control lighting operations of the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs.

Note that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 153SG321 and a second movable body 153SG322 that can move between the respective origin position and the effect position during variable display, an origin detection sensor 153SG331 that can detect that the first movable body 153SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 153SG321, and the second movable body 153. An origin detection sensor 153SG332 capable of detecting that the SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 153SG322 is connected.

FIG. 9-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 153SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a decorative pattern variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), different EXT data is set according to the determination result (predetermined result) as to whether the variable display result is "loss", "big hit", or "small hit", and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the second game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state) in which time reduction control is performed.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to specify which error (abnormality) has occurred on the performance control board 12 side, and the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing to be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. In the notification command during the opening of the large winning opening and the notification command after opening the large winning opening, different EXT data are set corresponding to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

Command B100H is a first starting winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A is established based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) being generated. Command B200H is a second starting winning designation command for notifying that a second starting condition for executing a special figure game using a second special figure in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is satisfied based on the fact that a game ball passing (entering) a second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is established, for example. The second reserved storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second starting opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is established, for example. Also, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command may be transmitted corresponding to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is established (when the number of reserved memories is reduced).

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol specifying command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probability variation, non-probability variation, etc.) as a result of determination at the time of winning. Also, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "others" as a result of determination at the time of winning.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 for providing a work area for game control, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 for executing control operations by executing the game control program, and a random number circuit 10 for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the CPU 103. 4, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in a variable data write operation. 5, a transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 is also performed.

FIG. 9-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-5, in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, the random number MR4 for determining the normal figure display result, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, each random number value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value within the range shown in FIG. 9-5, but the present invention is not limited to this.

FIG. 9-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for each of the cases in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is 'non-reach' and 'reach' among the cases where the variable display result is 'loss', and also for the case where the variable display result is 'big win'. In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, . . . may be provided as in super reach. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach α and super reach β which are the super reach fluctuation patterns. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is performed, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is performed is set longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is performed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes higher in the order of "big hit". Therefore, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, the longer the variation time, the higher the degree of expectation for a big win.

In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, the types of these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after determining the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, it is determined using only the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination without determining these types. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern. Then, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-6, the variation content (effect content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the same variation pattern is used, the variation content (effect content) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 of losing the normal reach, when the set value is 1, the variation pattern is the loss of the normal reach, when the set value is 2, the variation pattern is the loss of the non-ready reach by executing the pseudo continuous performance twice, and when the set value is 3, the variation pattern is the loss of the super reach by performing the pseudo continuous performance three times, and so on.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, a variation pattern table storing a plurality of variation patterns as variation modes of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols.

The determination table stored by the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 9-8 (A) (for the first special symbol), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. , a normal map display result determination table (not shown), a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value of 6, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game hall side, and the smaller values in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are more advantageous to the game hall side.

FIGS. 9-7(A) and 9-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the above-described hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the game state is the variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values than when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is "jackpot" when it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) is determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state (in the feature part 153SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and the set value is 4 In the case of 1/240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the big hit game state is higher (In the feature part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/200, when the set value is 2, 1/180, when the set value is 3, 1/160, and the set value is 4. 1/140 for , 1/120 for a set value of 5, and 1/100 for a set value of 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the variable probability state (high probability state), the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the big win game state so that the probability of determining to control to the big win game state is higher than when it is the normal state or the time saving state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state differs depending on each setting value (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability changing state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times. .56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.625 times)).

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as the ``small win'' has the same value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state. The probability of being determined is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or the set value, the determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining the special figure display result as a ``small win'' and controlling it to the small win game state is the same value different from the first special figure display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state. The probability of being determined is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" regardless of the setting value and is controlled to the small winning game state is the same probability. Furthermore, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" according to the variable special figure and is controlled to the small winning game state is exemplified in a different form, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" or "small hit" in each display result determination table, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for the set value 6.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot". A number within the range plus the number range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Here, when the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value as described above, while the small hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346). Since it is set to the range of 33094, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big win regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for the set value 6.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, if the setting value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot". A number within the added range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 among the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value, as in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674). Since it is set to the range of 33094, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big win regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for the set value 6.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot". A number within the range plus the number range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Here, when the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value as described above, while the small hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346). Since it is set within the range of 33421, it is possible to prevent the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which varies according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big win regardless of the setting value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for the set value 6.

That is, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the variable probability state, if the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot". A number within that range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 among the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value, as in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674). Since it is set within the range of 33421, it is possible to prevent the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which varies according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range based on the hit judgment value of 1020 is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and regardless of the game state and the setting value, the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) with the hit judgment value of 32767 as the reference. The variable display result is determined by using the value as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, when the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the same). In addition, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the first special figure display result determination table is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is 655, which is about double). 2767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and is controlled to the big win game state is lowest, and the larger the value of the setting value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result is to be controlled to the "jackpot" and to the big win game state. Set value 2>Set value 1).

In other words, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 coincides with any hit determination value corresponding to the big hit, decides that the special symbol is a big win (big win A to big win C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 9-7 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to a big winning game state, but it also means determining whether or not to make the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B a big winning symbol. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but it also means determining whether or not the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is to be a small winning symbol.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

9-8(A) and 9-8(B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 9-8 (A) is a table for determining the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning hole (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). In addition, FIG. 9-8 (B) is a table for determining the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed).

The big win type determination table is a table referred to for determining the big win type to be one of big wins A to C based on a random number (MR2) for winning type determination when it is determined that a variable display result should be a big win pattern.

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-9. In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, a jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) in which only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and shifts to a low-probability-high base state, and a jackpot B or a jackpot C (also referred to as a probability-variable jackpot) in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed and shifted to a high-probability-high base state after the jackpot game is set.

The big win game state by 'big win A' is a normal open big win repeated five rounds (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player, and the big win game state by 'big win B' is a normal open big win repeatedly executed by 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the jackpot game state of the "jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big win game state by the ``jackpot A'' ends when the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment) or when the big win game state is entered before the special game is executed the predetermined number of times.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the big win generated again is the big win B or the big win C, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called continuous game state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or less jackpot types or four or more jackpot types may be provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the big hit B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. That is, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, while the determination ratio of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the winning port into which the game ball has won is the first start prize-winning port or the second start prize-winning port, the jackpot type is determined by a common rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is determined as one of the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a big win variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variable display result "big win", a big win variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variable display result "small hit", and a loss variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variable display result "loss" are prepared in advance.

In the big-win variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to each of the variation patterns of the normal-reach big-hit variation pattern (PB1-1), the super-reach α-jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super-reach β-jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in FIGS. 9-10(A) and 9-10(B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A and a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot types are for jackpot B and jackpot C are prepared in advance, and these jackpot variation pattern determination tables are prepared in advance. (for jackpot A) and for jackpot variation pattern determination tables (for jackpot B and jackpot C), each variation pattern of normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) is assigned a predetermined random value as a determination value within the range that random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), 1 to 400 in the range of 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot. are assigned to different fluctuation patterns (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), 1 to 200 in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are super. It is assigned to the reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

Further, in the small-hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of the small-hit variation pattern (PC1-1), out of the possible range of the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns may be provided as small hit variation patterns.

In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss includes a variation pattern determination table for loss A that is used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not implemented, a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4 in the low base state, a variation pattern determination table C for loss that is used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state, and a high base state in which the game state is a time saving control. A variation pattern determination table D for failure, which is used when , is prepared in advance.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss A, a predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss A (for 1 or less total pending storage number in low base), 1 to 450 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to non-reach loss variation patterns (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to normal reach loss variation patterns (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α. It is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β.

In addition, in the loss variation pattern determination table B, a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value from the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4, the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending memories in low base), 1 to 500 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach. α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β deviation.

In addition, in the loss variation pattern determination table C, a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value from the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8, the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for loss C (for 5 or more total pending memories in low base), 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to non-reach loss variation patterns (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to normal reach loss variation patterns (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α. It is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation D, a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value from the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4) corresponding to the time reduction control, the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (D), in the losing variation pattern determination table D (for high base medium), 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach losing variation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach losing variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α losing variation pattern (PA2). -2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-3).

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern. In addition, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, regardless of the variation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β, respectively. I can.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the determining ratio of the variation pattern of losing super reach α and the determining percentage of the variation pattern of losing super reach β are completely the same among the set values as the variation pattern for losing. may be

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the variable display result is a loss, the determination ratio of all the variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, or only the determination ratio of any one of the non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) (see FIG. 9-6). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories is increased, a non-reach-loose variation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, making it easier to digest the reserved memory, and by starting winning when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit number of 4, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes in which no reserved memory is performed. It is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game due to non-execution of the display.

Further, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A) to 9-11 (C), the variation pattern is determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the total pending storage number. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When performing variable display, a variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol.

Further, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect and which ready-to-win effect is to be executed for each determined variation pattern are exemplified in a one-to-one correspondence.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 9-12(A), the display monitor 153SG029 includes a first display section 153SG029A, a second display section 153SG029B, a third display section 153SG029C, and a fourth display section 153SG029D. Each of the first display portion 153SG029A to the fifth display portion 153SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 153SG029A to fifth display section 153SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 153SG029 in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment is executed using the area outside the test object in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 when the pachinko game machine 1 is tested.

As shown in FIGS. 9-12(B) and 9-12(C), the display monitor 153SG029 displays base L which is the base value (real-time value during measurement) calculated in the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 6000 out-outs in all game states, base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 6000 first outs in all game states, and second outs in all game states. It is possible to display the base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability/low base state) for every 6000 balls and the base 3 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability/low base state) for every 6000 balls out in the whole game state. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed in percentages on display monitor 153SG029.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed in the first display section 153SG029A and "L." is displayed in the second display section 153SG029B to display "bL." It is displayed in G029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed in the first display section 153SG029A and "1." is displayed in the second display section 153SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." 029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed in the first display section 153SG029A and "2." is displayed in the second display section 153SG029B to display the abbreviation "b2." 029D. Further, when the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed in the first display section 153SG029A and "3." is displayed in the second display section 153SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." 029D.

In the display monitor 153SG029 of the present embodiment, control for sequentially displaying these base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 is executed under the control of the main substrate 11 (CPU 103). For example, the main substrate 11 performs control to switch the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The base values displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 are displayed in different colors according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in white, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in green. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "5", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in red. Displayed in purple. Therefore, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 153SG029 without executing the setting value change processing described later by the CPU 103 .

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 9-2 is provided with a production control data holding area 153SG190 as shown in FIG. The effect control data holding area 153SG190 shown in FIG. 9-13(A) includes a effect control flag setting portion 153SG191, a effect control timer setting portion 153SG192, a effect control counter setting portion 153SG193, and a effect control buffer setting portion 153SG194.

The effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. - 特許庁For example, the effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 stores data indicating a timer value in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 153SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A as shown in FIG. The start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory, and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure during the variable display. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A, a storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total reserved storage number of the second special figure reserved storage (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") are provided. When there is a start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, four commands of a starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), a pattern designation command, a variation category designation command and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation memory in the reception command buffer 153SG194A at the time of start winning are secured with a storage area (entry) for storing separately the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory by associating these start entry winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, and reservation number notification command.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted upward one by one as will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started, and the memory contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved memory where the start condition is satisfied are cleared in the decorative pattern variation stop processing executed when the variable display is terminated.

Furthermore, in the start-winning reception command buffer 153SG194A in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, a storage area for a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending storage display is set in the later-described pre-reading advance notice setting process (FIG. 9-18) is secured for each storage area (entry).

In addition, when execution of the pending display notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process described later, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display is stored in the pending display flag, so that the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D and the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. By setting "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the reserved memory display of mode (for example, square (◇) or star (☆)) or "3" (blue camera) or "4" (red camera) corresponding to the display pattern of the reserved memory display of the special mode (for example, blue or red camera), the retained memory display of a mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first retained memory display area 153SG005D and the second retained memory display area 153SG005D. It is displayed in a display area 153SG005U, and in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display, the possibility of a big win or super reach, and the high possibility of execution of a setting suggestion performance suggesting the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 are announced.

At the time of start winning to the first start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A. store it. At the time of starting winning, from the starting mouth winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command is sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variation category designation command, and the reservation number notification command are stored in the storage areas respectively corresponding to the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage or the second special figure reservation storage.

9-13(B), each time the variable display of decorative patterns is started, the command stored in the entry (entry of buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") corresponding to the suspended storage of the variable display that was completed immediately before is deleted, and the command stored in the entry (entry corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") corresponding to the suspended storage of the variable display to be started is deleted. The memory contents of the entries after the pending memory of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 9-13 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reserved memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in the buffer number "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1", and each command stored in the area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is It is shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is being variably displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment will be described. 9-14 is a flow chart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (153SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (153SGSa002). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (153SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (153SGSa004; N), proceed to 153SGSa017. (153SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; N), proceed to 153SGSa017. If the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; Y), setting value change indicating that the setting value change processing described later was being executed before the power interruption (the power interruption occurred during the execution of the setting value change processing). It is determined whether or not the flag is set (153SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (153SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 153SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (153SGSa007), and whether the clear switch is ON, that is, whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. It is determined whether or not (153SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (153SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 153SGSa011 (153SGSa010). If the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa008; N), proceed to 153SGSa011 without executing 153SGSa010.

At 153SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011). If the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa012). When the open sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch 153SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 153SG003 opened (153SGSa012; Y), it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (153SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 153SGSa013d; Execute the set value confirmation process (153SGSa013c) and proceed to 153SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (153SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set set value on the display monitor 153SG029. Next, every time the setting switch 153SG052 is operated, the setting values are updated and displayed on the display monitor 153SG029. When the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and a setting value designation command capable of specifying the setting value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 is output to the performance control CPU 120. - 特許庁

Also, in the set value confirmation process (153SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set set values on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, when the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off, the display of the set values on the display monitor 153SG029 can be ended.

If the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF at 153SGSa011 (153SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (153SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d without executing the processes of 153SGSa013a to 153SGSa013c.

At 153SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (RAM clear processing (153SGSa009) is executed) (153SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to 153SGSa014.

In the RAM clearing process (153SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes a process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the addresses storing the set values and the addresses storing (set) the RAM clear flag. That is, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGSa001 to 153SGSa013e and 153SGSa017 to 153SGSa021 described later, when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the contents of all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored are cleared.

At 153SGSa014, the CPU 103 again determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014; Y), proceed to 153SGSa022. If the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa014; N), restore processing is performed to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped (power outage) (153SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is recovered, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before the restoration by executing timer interrupt processing for game control to be described later. Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko game machine 1 has been restored (activated by hot start) in the state before the power failure, and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 153SGSa028 (153SGSa016).

Also, at 153SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (153SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (153SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa019).

If the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, if there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or the normal setting value is not set, but the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to the formal procedure by the operation of the game hall employee (game machine frame 153SG003 When the pachinko game machine 1 is started while operating the clear switch with the lock switch 153SG051 turned ON), the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (153SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (153SGSa021). Then, the processes 153SGSa009 to 153SGSa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa017; N), the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF (153SGSa018; N), and the open sensor 153SG090 is OFF (153SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa031.

In addition, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated by cold start (153SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko game machine 1 is set (153SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting blinking of all segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 (153SGSa024).

After executing 153SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (153SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (153SGSa026; N), the processes of 153SGSa025 and 153SGSa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026; Y), blinking of all segments on the display monitor 153SG029 is terminated (153SGSa027), and 153SGSa02 Go to 8.

In the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , at least a part of all segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 may be lit.

Then, in 153SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (153SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (153SGSa029), and permits the interrupt (153SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, at 153SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormality error) and the recovery from the power interruption during the setting change described later, and the like, to the effect control board 12. Transmits an error designation command corresponding to the set value abnormality (153SGSa031). Furthermore, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (153SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (153SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (153SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (153SGSa034; N), the processing of 153SGSa033 and 153SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (153SGSa034; Y), the display monitor 153SG029 is configured as notification (error notification) of the occurrence of a setting value abnormal error or recovery from a power failure during setting change. is displayed on each of the first display portion 153SG029A, the second display portion 153SG029B, the third display portion 153SG029C, and the fourth display portion 153SG029D (153SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B (153SGSa036), outputs a security signal to the management device such as the management computer of the game hall through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1, and proceeds to 153SGSa032 (153SGSa037). . Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 153SGSa032 to 153SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 (until the power supply of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a game hall clerk or the like), thereby causing an error caused by the display monitor 153SG029, the first special symbol display device 153SG004A, and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B. to notify the occurrence of

In this way, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment executes an error occurrence notification by the display monitor 153SG029, the first special symbol display device 153SG004A, and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is restored, so that the game hall clerk etc. It is possible to recognize from both the side and the back side that an error has occurred or that the power has recovered from a power failure during the change of the setting value. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, in the game control main processing of the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-14, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 153SGSa008 (153SGSa008; Y) and after clearing the setting value changing flag in 153SGSa021, RAM clear processing (153SGSa009) is executed, but the present invention is limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 153SGSa014 (153SGSa014; Y), not when it is determined in 153SGSa008 that the clear switch is ON (153SGSa008; Y) or after the set value changing flag is cleared in 153SGSa021.

FIG. 9-15 is a flow chart showing the start winning determination process (S101) executed by the CPU 103 in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first starting opening switch 22A is on based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A (153SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (153SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number). CPU103, for example by reading the first reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient to specify the number of first special figure reservation memory. At 153SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (153SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1" (153SGS103).

When the first starting opening switch 22A is off at 153SGS101 (153SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reserved storage has reached the upper limit at 153SGS102 (153SGS102; Y), based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the second starting opening switch 22B. is on (153SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (153SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At 153SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (153SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (153SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of 153SGS103 and 153SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (153SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. Thus, the count value of the number of the first reserve memory is updated so as to be increased by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning hole and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to be increased by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning hole and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (153SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section (not shown), may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of 153SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown) (153SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (153SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), while numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown) when the start opening buffer value is "2".

Numerical data indicating a random number MR1 for judging the result of special figure display and a random number MR2 for judging the kind of big hit is used for judging whether or not the result of fluctuation display of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be ``big hit'', and further, to judge the kind of big hit when the result of fluctuation display is ``big hit''. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 153SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results of the special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 153SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (153SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning designation command to the performance control board 12 is performed by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command to the performance control board 12 is performed by storing the memory address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG.

Following the process of 153SGS111, the winning random number determination process is executed (153SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (153SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG.

After executing the process of 153SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (153SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (Y at 153SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (153SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 153SGS104. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (N at 153SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (S116), and then the start winning process is terminated. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 9-16(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed by 153SGS 112 of FIG. 9-15 as the winning random number determination process. In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbols and the decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 5) determines whether the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is to be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit", whether to control the special symbol display result to the small hit game state as "small hit", etc. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 5), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random number determination process at the time of winning of 153SGS112, thereby determining whether or not to derive and display a big hit symbol as a special figure display result, determining whether or not to derive and display a small winning symbol as a special figure display result, and determining whether or not to derive and display a small winning symbol as a special figure display result. It is determined whether or not a predetermined display mode with reach is achieved. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening, that is, before it is determined whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether the special symbol display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be. Then, the pending display notice effect is executed.

In the random value determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, confirming the state of a time saving flag or a variable probability flag provided in a game control flag setting unit (not shown) (153SGS121). The CPU 103 may specify the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specify the time saving state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and specify the normal state when both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are off.

Following the processing of 153SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-7 is selected and set (153SGS122). At this time, the CPU 103 sets the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-7 (A) if the starting buffer value is 1, and if the starting buffer value is 2, the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-7 (B).

After that, with reference to the jackpot numerical range (jackpot determination range) according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the set display result determination table, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at 153SGS109 in FIGS. 9-15 is within the jackpot determination range (153SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit" in the display result determination table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 and each determination value one by one, so that it is sufficient to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the big hit determination range are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the big hit determination range to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the big hit determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the big hit determination range at 153SGS123, that is, when it is determined that it does not become a big hit at the time of variable display (153SGS123; N), the small hit numerical range (small hit determination range) according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the display result determination table set further is referred to, and the special figure display result determination extracted at 153SGS109 in FIGS. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range (153SGS124). In the small hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display results of "small hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 and each judgment value one by one, so that it is possible to judge the presence or absence of the judgment value that matches the random number MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the small hit determination range are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the small hit determination range, thereby determining whether the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "small hit".

When it is determined at 153SGS124 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that there is no small hit at the time of variable display (153SGS124; N), transmission setting of the symbol designation command corresponding to the result of variable display being "miss" is executed (153SGS125), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current game state is the time saving state (153SG). S126). When the time saving flag is not set (153SGS126; N), the change pattern determination table A for loss is selected and set (153SGS127), and when the time saving flag is set (153SGS126; Y), the change pattern determination table D for loss is selected and set (153SGSS128).

Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is one or less, as shown in FIG. 9-11(A). In addition, the variation pattern determination table D for loss is used when the game state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (D). It is a variation pattern determination table for loss.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in addition to these variation pattern determination table for loss A and variation pattern determination table for loss D, a variation pattern determination table for loss B that is used when the total number of retained memories is 2 to 4, and a variation pattern determination table for loss C that is used when the total number of retained memories is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance. In the judgment table A, a value of 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for judgment of the fluctuation pattern can take, and in the fluctuation pattern judgment tables B and C for loss, a value exceeding 0 to 450 out of the range that the random number value MR3 for judgment of the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, values from 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of super reach within the range of possible random number values MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment.

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern (variation category) using the variation pattern determination table A for loss in 153SGS132 described later, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always a variation pattern of non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination.

As shown in FIG. 9-16(A), when 153SGS123 determines that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (153SGS123; Y), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (153SGS130). At this time, a CPU 103 selects table data for big hit type determination from table data constituting a big hit type determination table according to a variable special figure (a ``first special figure'' corresponding to ``1'' or a ``second special figure'' corresponding to ``2'') specified corresponding to the start buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command corresponding to the big hit type determined in 153SGS130 is executed (153SG131), and the big win variation pattern determination table is selected and set as a table for determining one of a plurality of big win variation patterns (153SG132).

Further, when it is determined at 153SGS124 that it is within the small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that a small hit will occur during variable display (153SGS124; Y), transmission setting of a symbol designation command corresponding to the small hit type is executed (153SG129).

After executing any of the processes of 153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153SGS129, and 153SGS132, using numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination table and the random value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern set in the processes of 153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153SGS129, and 153SGS132, the random value A variation category is determined according to the range of determination values including MR3 (153SGS133). In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-16(B), at least when the variable display result is "loss", regardless of the total number of reserved memories, a variable category with a variable display mode of "non-reach", a variable category with a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category with a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit). .

After that, after performing setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 153SGS132 to the effect control board 12 (153SGS134), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIG. 9-17 is a part of the flow chart of the effect control process (S76) in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment. In the effect control process processing in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, after the execution of the pre-reading notice setting processing (S161) shown in FIG. 7, the display mode and the number of display of the pending memory display displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D and the second pending memory display area 153SG005U The pending display update process for updating according to the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 9-13 (B) was executed. One of the processes of S170 to S177 shown in FIG. 7 is executed later.

FIG. 9-18 is a flow chart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 9-17. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. If there is no entry with no pending display flag set, pre-reading notice setting processing is terminated, and if there is any entry with no pending display flag set, it is determined whether or not there is an entry whose value of the pending display flag is already set to any one of 1 to 4 (153SGS243).

When there is an entry whose value of the pending display flag is already set to any one of 1 to 4, that is, when the pending display notice effect is already executed, the pending display flag of the entry (the entry determined that the pending display flag is not set in 153SGS242) is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect (that is, it is decided to display the pending memory display corresponding to the entry with "○"), and the prefetching notice setting process is terminated (153SGS25). 1). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry whose value of the pending display flag is already set to any one of 1 to 4 means that the pending display notice effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 153SGS243, when the pending display forewarning effect has already been executed, the execution of the new pending display foretelling effect is restricted.

In 153SGS243, when there is no entry set to any one of the values 1 to 4 of the pending display flag, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern designation command of the entry (the entry determined that the pending display flag is not set in 153SGS242) indicates a big win (153SGS244). When the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a big hit, the jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (153SGS245), and a jackpot pending display notice effect determination table (not shown) is referred to based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193, for example, and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS245. Thus, whether or not to execute the pending display notice effect and the display pattern in the case of executing the pending display notice effect are determined (153SGS246).

In 153SG246, for example, whether or not to execute the pending display forewarning effect and the display pattern (forecast type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 9-19(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-19 (A), depending on the jackpot type specified in the processing of 153SGS245, the presence or absence of the pending display notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, four types of display patterns (preview types) of the pending display pre-notice effect are provided: the display pattern α, the display pattern β, the display pattern γ, and the display pattern δ. Among these, when the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. 3SG005U, and when the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U with the blue camera, and when the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern δ, the pending memory display is the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153 with the red camera. Displayed in SG005U. Further, when non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, the pending memory display is displayed in a white circle (○) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (A), when the jackpot type is the jackpot A (non-probable variable jackpot), non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern α is decided at a rate of 55%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 20%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%, and execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%. , execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined. In addition, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B or the jackpot C (probability variable jackpot), non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern α is decided at a rate of 20%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 55%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%, and execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern δ is decided at a rate of 10%. execution is decided.

Returning to 153SGS244, when the symbol designation command of the entry is a loss or a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variation category from the variation category designation command of the entry (153SGS248), for example, the numerical data indicating the random value for the pending display notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193, and the jackpot specified in 153SGS249. Based on the type, whether or not to execute the pending display advance notice effect and the display pattern are determined by referring to a small hit/losing holding display notice effect determination table (not shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-19(B), when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern α is decided at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 0%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 0%, and execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 0%. execution of the pending display notice effect is determined. In addition, when the variable display result is a loss or a small win and the variation category is other (normal reach is a loss or a small win), non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern α is decided at a rate of 20%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 0%, and display pattern is decided at a rate of 0%. Execution of the pending display forewarning effect at δ is determined. Further, when the variable display result is a failure and the variable category is super reach, non-execution of the pending display forenotice performance is determined at a rate of 55%, execution of the pending display forenotice performance with the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%, execution of the pending display forenotice performance with the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the pending display forenotice performance with the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the pending display forenotice performance with the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 5%.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 9-19 (A) and 9-19 (B), in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending display notice effect is executed, the control is performed to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than when the pending display notice effect is not executed. It is set to be a big hit). By such setting, when the variable display result is "big win" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the ratio of the big win type to be the probability variable big win is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed, and the player's expectation for the probability variable big win can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns suggesting the execution of a setting suggestion performance to be described later, the degree of expectation (big win expectation degree) for being controlled to the big win game state is not set higher than the display pattern α and the display pattern β, and the expectation degree (probability variable big win expectation degree) for the big win type being the big win B or the big win C is the same.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the variation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result is a big win are the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach, and as shown in FIG. 9-19, when the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are determined, the variable display result is a big win or the variable display result is a loss, and the variation category is super reach. In other words, the pending memory display of the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (blue and red camera aspects) also suggests that it is a super reach variable display capable of executing a setting suggestion effect, which will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (B), if the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, if it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach, the pending memory display is not displayed in blue or red camera mode.

Returning to FIG. 9-18, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display notice effect is determined after executing the process of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 (153SGS250). When execution of pending display notice performance is determined, a value (one of 1 to 4) corresponding to the display pattern determined by the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 is set to the pending display flag of the entry, and the prefetching notice setting processing is terminated (153SGS247). When it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect, and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated (153SGS251).

9-20 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271). When the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271; Y), various command data and various flags (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed in variable display, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth first special figure reservation storage) stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer (not shown) are stored for one buffer number. It shifts up by one (153SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-0", the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the first special figure pending storage. The flag is shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number ``1-2'', and various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number ``1-4'' of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number ``1-3''.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 153SGS271 (153SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273). If the second variation start command reception flag is not set (153SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273; Y), various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning time reception command buffer (not shown) (That is, corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variablely) Various command data and various flags, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth second special figure reservation storage) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-0", the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the various command data and various types stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the second special figure pending storage. The flag is shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number ``2-2'', and various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number ``2-4'' of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number ``2-3''.

After executing 153SGS272 or 153SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (153SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (153SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In the characteristic part 153SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decoration patterns (big hit pattern) in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as stop patterns. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big win B, the stop pattern is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd number patterns other than '7' (for example, combinations of decoration patterns such as '111', '333', '555' and '999'). When the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the big win C, a combination of decoration patterns (big win pattern) in which three patterns are ``7'' is determined as a stop pattern. Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small win, the stop pattern is determined from the chance numbers ("334", "556", "778", etc. where the three patterns are not aligned under a specific rule) indicating the small win. When the received variable display result designation command is a first variable display result designation command corresponding to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three patterns are not aligned as a stop pattern and a combination other than the above-described chance eye (lost pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop patterns, the performance control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop patterns, and determines the stop patterns of the decorative patterns by using a stop pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns and numerical values are associated with each other. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (153SGS277). When the variation pattern of the variable display is not the variation pattern of the super reach, the process proceeds to 153SGS285, and when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach, the rear variable display suggestion performance determination processing for determining whether or not the rear variable display suggestion performance is executed during the variable display ready reach performance and which performance is to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion performance is executed (153SGS278). That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGS277 to 153SG278, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display (big hit suggestive effect or setting suggestive effect) can be executed only in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern with a long special figure variation time, and is not performed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach variation pattern with a short special figure variation time.

As shown in FIG. 9-28, in the super ready-to-win variable display in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a timer effect suggesting a period from the start timing of the variable display to the start of the rear variable display during the ready-to-win effect, which is the latter half of the variable display, as a suggestive effect during the front variable display, suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit. As the suggesting performance during display, a big win suggesting performance suggesting that the variable display result will be a big win or a setting suggesting performance suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be executed. In other words, the process of 153SGS278 is the process of determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and which of the big win suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect to be executed during the ready-to-win effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display (either the big hit suggestive effect or the set suggestive effect) has been determined in the process of 153SGS278 (153SGS279). When the non-execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined in the process of 153SGS278, the process proceeds to 153SGS285, and when the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined in the process of 153SGS278, the suggestive effect during the front variable display is further determined to determine which of the character effect and the timer effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display from the start of the variable display (153SGS280). That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is not determined unless execution of the performance during the rear variable display is determined, that is, in the non-reach or normal reach variable display in which the set suggestive performance cannot be executed, the timer performance or character performance is not executed as the suggestive performance during the front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the character effect has been determined as the suggestive effect during front variable display (153SGS281). When it is decided to execute a character effect as a suggestive effect during the front variable display, a value corresponding to the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display (5 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect as shown in FIG. 9-28(A)) is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the variable front part display, and the process proceeds to 153SG285 (153SGS282). Set a period until the start of the suggested effect (as shown in FIG. 9-28(B), a value corresponding to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, 5 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect if the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-1 that is a 25-second effect period, and 10 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect if the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-2 that is a 30-second effect period)), and proceed to 153SGS285. 283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern in 153SGS285. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (153SGS286).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device (image display device 5 as a component for effect, various lamps as components for effect, speakers 8L and 8R as components for effect, operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (153SGS287). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this characterizing part 153SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one, but the performance control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (153SGS288). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (153SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns in the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (153SGS290).

FIG. 9-21 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during rear variable display (153SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 9-20. 9-21, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 9-13(B) to specify the value of the pending display flag corresponding to the variable display (153SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the pending display flag of the entry "1-0" of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A is specified, and when the second variable display start command reception flag is set, the entry "2-0" of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggested effect during the variable rear display and the effect to be executed as the suggestive effect during the variable rear display based on the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SG301 (153SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-22(A), when the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "0", that is, when the reserved display notice effect is not executed for the variable display, 90% of the time, the non-execution of the rear variable display suggesting effect is determined, the 10% of the ratio determines the execution of the big hit suggesting effect as the rear variable display suggesting effect, and the 0% of the set suggesting effect as the rear variable display suggesting effect. decide to run. In addition, when the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, when the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape as a reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 50% of the ratio determines non-execution of the rear variable display suggesting effect, 50% of the ratio determines the execution of the big hit suggesting effect as the rear variable display suggesting effect, and 0% of the set suggesting effect as the rear variable display suggesting effect. decide to run.

Further, when the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is ``3'', that is, when the reserved memory display is displayed by the blue camera as the reserved display advance notice performance for the variable display, non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, execution of the big win suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 35%, and execution of the set suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 35%. Then, when the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is ``4'', that is, when the reserved memory display is displayed by the red camera as the reserved display advance notice performance for the variable display, non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 0%, execution of the big hit suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution of the set suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 70%.

In other words, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the holding display forewarning effect is executed for the variable display, execution of the hinting effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when the holding display forewarning effect is not executed for the variable display. Furthermore, when the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"), the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape as the pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "1" or "2"). It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as the pending display notice effect.

In addition, focusing on the case where the reserved memory display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the reserved display forewarning effect for the variable display (when the value of the reserved display flag is "3" or "4"), when the reserved memory display is displayed by the red camera as the reserved display forewarning effect for the variable display, execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when the reserved memory display is displayed by the blue camera as the reserved display forewarning effect for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the set suggestion performance as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when the suspension memory display is displayed by the blue camera as the suspension display advance notice performance for the variable display.

As described above, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the reserved memory display is displayed in a square or star shape as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. It is designed to attract people's attention.

Furthermore, when the pending memory display is displayed by the red camera as the pending display advance notice effect for the variable display, the ratio of executing the setting suggesting effect as the rear variable display suggesting effect is higher than when the reserve memory display is displayed by the blue camera as the reserve display advance notice effect for the variable display, so that the player can be made to pay more attention to whether the setting suggesting effect is executed as the rear variable display suggesting effect.

Returning to FIG. 9-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display has been determined in the process of 153SGS302 (153SGS303). When non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined in the processing of 153SGS302, the suggestive performance determination processing during the variable rear display is terminated, and when execution of the suggestive performance during the variable rear display is determined in the processing of 153SGS302, it is further determined whether or not execution of the suggestive performance of a big hit as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display is determined in the processing of 153SGS302 (153SGS304).

In the processing of 153SGS302, when the execution of the big win suggestive performance is determined as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, the performance pattern of the big win suggestive performance is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the suggestive performance determination processing during the rear variable display is completed (153SGS305).

As shown in FIG. 9-22(B), three effect patterns, pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3, are provided as effect patterns that can be determined in the process of 153SGS305. Of these production patterns, pattern AS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the variable display result will result in a big hit (low expectation), pattern AS-2 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: medium) that suggests that the variable display result will result in a big hit, and pattern AS-3 is a production pattern that suggests that the variable display result will result in a big hit (big hit). Expectation level: high).

Then, in the process of 153SGS305 described above, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the variable display result is a big hit, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance pattern of the big hit suggestion performance to be the pattern AS-1 at a rate of 10%, the pattern AS-2 at a rate of 30%, and the pattern AS-3 at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, when execution of setting suggesting effect as suggesting effect during rear variable display is determined in the process of 153SGS302, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and specifies the set value (the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1) from the set value designation command received from the CPU 103 (153SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestive effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display (153SGS307).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-22(B), a total of five patterns from pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5 are provided as determinable effect patterns in 153SG307. Among these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd number (eg, 1, 3, 5), pattern SS-2 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an even number (eg, 2, 4, 6), pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (eg, 3 or 5), and pattern SS-4 suggests that the setting value is an even-numbered intermediate setting or higher (eg, , 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

Patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that the set value is either 5 or 6 (high setting).

In this characteristic portion 153SG, the setting values 1 to 4 are set low and the setting values 5 and 6 are high, but the setting values 1 and 3 may be low and the setting values 4 and 6 may be high.

In the processing of 153SGS307 described above, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, as shown in FIG. 9-24, the production control CPU 120 determines the pattern SS-1 at a rate of 60%, the pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, the pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, the pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, and the pattern S at a rate of 0%. Decide on S-5. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the performance pattern is determined as pattern SS-1 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 60%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 6%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 9%, and pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the performance pattern is determined as pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 10%, and pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the pattern SS-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%, the pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the pattern SS-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the pattern SS-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, the pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 15%, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 5%.

As described above, in the characteristic part 153SG, the set value suggesting effect is executed in pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2 to suggest that the set value is any one of 1 to 4, and the set value suggesting effect to be executed in pattern SS-3 or pattern SS-4 suggests that the set value is 5 or 6. Then, when the setting suggesting effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, the setting value of 6 is confirmed.

FIG. 9-25 is a flow chart showing a suggestive effect determination process during front variable display (153SGS280) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 9-20. 9-25, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (153SGS311). In addition, it is determined whether or not execution of the setting suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during rear variable display (153SGS312).

When the execution of the big win suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined, whether or not to execute the suggestive performance during the front variable display and the performance to be executed as the suggestive performance during the front variable display are determined from the character performance and the timer performance based on the execution of the big win suggestive performance and the result of the variable display (153SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-26(A), when the variable display result is a big win, 40% of the ratio determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the front variable display, 30% of the ratio determines the execution of the character performance as the suggestive performance during the front variable display, and 30% of the ratio determines the execution of the timer performance as the suggestive performance during the variable front display. When the result of variable display is a failure, non-execution of suggestive performance during front variable display is determined at a rate of 70%, execution of character performance as suggestive performance during front variable display is determined at a rate of 25%, and execution of timer performance is determined as suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 5%.

That is, in the case where the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big win, the suggestive effect during the front variable display is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, and when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the character effect and the timer effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is determined at the same rate, and when the variable display result is a loss, the character effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display. is determined at a rate higher than that of the execution of the timer effect, that is, the degree of expectation for the big win of the timer effect is set higher than the degree of expectation for the big win of the character effect.

In addition, when the execution of the setting suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggestive performance during the front variable display based on the execution of the setting suggestive performance and the result of the variable display, and determines the performance to be executed as the suggestive performance during the front variable display from the character performance and the timer performance (153SGS314). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-26(B), when the result of variable display is a big hit, non-execution of suggestive performance during variable front display is determined at a rate of 30%, execution of character performance as suggestive performance during variable front display is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of timer performance is determined as suggestive performance during variable front display at a rate of 70%. When the result of the variable display is a failure, non-execution of suggestive performance during front variable display is determined at a rate of 80%, execution of character performance as suggestive performance during front variable display is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of timer performance is determined as suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 20%.

In other words, in the case where execution of the set suggesting effect during the rear variable display is determined, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the suggestive effect during the front variable display is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, and regardless of whether the variable display result is a big win or a loss, the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is not determined. .

Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, execution of the timer performance is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, so that when the timer performance is executed as the suggestive performance during the front part variable display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable display result becoming a big win.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-25, after executing 153SGS313 or 153SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during front variable display is determined (153SGS315). When the non-execution of the suggestive performance during the variable front part display is decided, the suggestive performance decision processing during the variable front part display is ended, and when the execution of the suggestive performance during the variable front part display is decided, it is further determined whether or not the execution of the character performance is decided as the suggestive performance during the variable front part display (153SGS316).

When execution of character performance is determined as suggestive performance during front variable display, performance pattern of character performance is determined and stored based on the result of variable display, and suggestive performance determination processing during front variable display is completed (153SGS317).

Incidentally, as the effect pattern of the character effect that can be determined in the process of 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. 9-26(C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2, are provided. Of these performance patterns, the pattern CS-1 is a performance pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the variable display result is likely to win a big hit by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5, and the pattern CS-2 is a performance pattern (big hit expectation: medium) that suggests that the variable display result will be a big win by displaying the character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 than the pattern CS-1.

Therefore, in the process of 153SGS317, when the variable display result is a big win, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the character effect to be pattern CS-1 at a rate of 20% and pattern CS-2 at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 9-27(A). On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the pattern CS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the character effect at a rate of 80%, and the pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%.

When execution of the timer performance is determined as the suggestive performance during the front part variable display, the performance control CPU 120 determines and stores the performance pattern of the timer performance based on the performance determined to be executed as the suggestive performance during the rear part variable display, and ends the suggestive performance determination processing during the variable part display (153SGS318).

As shown in FIG. 9-26(C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided as effect patterns of the timer effect that can be determined in the processing of 153SGS318. Pattern TS-1 among these effect patterns suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit on the image display device 5 is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character effect (expectation for big win: high), and also suggests a period of 25 seconds until the execution of the suggested effect during the rear variable display is started along with the image of the character X. Pattern TS-2 has a higher ratio of the variable display result to a big win on the image display device 5 than the pattern CS-1 and the pattern CS-2 of the character effect. (Expectation for big hit: high), and the period until the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is started, together with the image of the character Y, is suggested for 25 seconds (see FIGS. 9-27 (C), 9-29 (D), and 9-29 (E)).

Therefore, in the process of 153SGS318, when the suggestive effect during the rear variable display determined to be executed is the jackpot suggestive effect as shown in FIG. 9-27(B), the effect pattern of the timer effect is determined to be the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern TS-2 at a rate of 20%. In addition, when the suggested performance during rear variable display whose execution is determined is the set suggested performance, the performance control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and determines the pattern TS-2 at a rate of 20%.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the front part variable display, the ratio of executing the set suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear part variable display is set higher in the case where the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 than in the case where the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1 (that is, when the effect period of the timer effect is longer and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A). Therefore, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5 . In addition, when the timer performance is executed in the pattern TS-2, the player can expect the execution of the setting suggestion performance more than when the timer performance is executed in the pattern TS-1, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-26(D), when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, the expectation for the big win is set higher than when the character effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and the set suggestive effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable rear display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display.

As shown in FIGS. 9-20 to 9-28, when execution of the suggestive effect during variable display is determined during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 may set process data according to the determined effect pattern of the suggestive effect during variable display during variable display (S172), and may control the effect device according to the content of the process data according to the process timer during effect processing during variable display (S172) thereafter. In addition, when execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined during the variable display, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the waiting timer for the start of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display by -1 each time the performance processing during the variable display is executed, and based on the value of the waiting timer for the start of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display becoming 0, sets the process data corresponding to the performance pattern of the determined suggestive performance during the rear variable display. Then, the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the effect process during variable display (S172).

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 9-28 (A) and 9-28 (B), the jackpot suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display in the present characteristic portion 153SG are executed over 7 seconds which is a longer period than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 9-6) during the execution period of the reach effect. Therefore, even if the player looks away from the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the big win suggesting effect or the setting suggesting effect.

Next, an effect mode during variable display in the characteristic portion 153SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-29 to 9-31. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-29 (A) and 9-29 (B), a new start winning occurs during the variable display, and the display pattern of the pending memory display as a pre-reading notice effect based on the starting winning is determined to be the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, the new pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-29(C) to 9-29(E), when the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display, which is the form of the camera, is started as a new variable display, the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display is started. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-1, as shown in FIG. 9-29(D), the image 153SG005X of the character X is displayed on the left part of the image display device 5, and the update display of the timer is started for 25 seconds, which is the period until the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. When the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. 9-29(E), the image 153SG005Y of the character Y is displayed on the left part of the image display device 5, and the 30-second timer update display is started, which is the period until the suggestive effect during the rear variable display.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 9-30(F) to 9-30(H), when the variable display progresses together with the update display of the timer until the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, the super ready-to-win effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds (timer performance ends) during execution of the super ready-to-win performance, a big hit suggesting performance or setting suggesting performance is started as a suggesting performance during rear variable display.

Specifically, when execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, a message indicating that the degree of expectation for a big win is low, such as "Chance!", is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. A message indicating that the pattern is higher than 1 is displayed, and if the determined performance pattern is the pattern AS-3, a message indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-2 is displayed on the image display device 5, such as "Extremely Hot!", as shown in FIG. 9-30 (K).

On the other hand, when execution of the setting suggesting effect is determined as the suggesting effect during rear variable display, as shown in FIGS. 9-31(L) to 9-31(P), when the effect patterns of the setting suggesting effect are patterns SS-1 to SS-4, the image display device 5 displays setting value suggesting images 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG005J, and 131SG005K of different characters respectively. By doing so, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested. Further, when the effect pattern of the setting value suggesting effect is the pattern SS-5, the image display device 5 displays a setting value suggesting image 131SGS005L in which all the characters displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to SS-4 are assembled.

As described above, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading notice, the setting suggesting effect is executed at a higher rate than when the pre-reading notice is not executed or when the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. Therefore, the player can make preparations for photographing the setting suggesting performance with a mobile terminal such as a smart phone that the player possesses in anticipation that the setting suggesting performance will be executed in advance at the stage when the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode. In other words, the pending memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment is also an effect prompting the player to prepare for photographing the setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect as a suggestive effect during the front variable display indicating the degree of expectation of a big win, and a timer effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the character effect, and as shown in FIG. That is, when the timer performance is executed, the player pays more attention to whether or not the result of the variable display becomes a big hit because the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the character performance is executed.

In addition to the character performance, a timer performance suggesting a period until the start of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display can be executed as the suggestive performance during the front part variable display during the variable display, so that the player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggestive performance by executing the setting suggestive performance.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as the timer effect, the period until the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is started is exemplified by displaying a numerical value (see FIGS. 9-29(D) and 9-29(E)), but the present invention is not limited to this. may suggest only a period of time).

9-29(D) and 9-29(E), the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the timer effect is executed by image display on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of image display on the image display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and display on display means other than the image display device 5 may be executed in combination. You may

Further, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-30 (H) and 9-31 (L), based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 has become 0 as a timer effect, there is a case where a big hit suggesting effect is executed in addition to the set suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. In other words, even when the timer performance is executed, the big hit suggestion performance may be executed instead of the setting suggestion performance, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game interest can be improved.

In the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, only one of the setting suggesting performance and the big hit suggesting performance can be executed as the rear variable display during suggesting performance based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 has become 0 as the timer performance. may be

Furthermore, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the timer effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the front variable display, the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is always executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-27(B) and 9-27(C), as the performance patterns of the timer performance, a pattern TS-1 having a performance period of 25 seconds and a pattern TS-2 having a performance period of 30 seconds are provided, and when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion performance is executed at a higher rate than when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-1. That is, when the timer performance is executed in the pattern TS-2, it is suggested that the setting suggesting performance is executed for a longer period than in the case where the timer performance is executed in the pattern TS-1, so that the overlooking of the setting suggesting performance by the player can be further prevented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-28, the suggestion performance during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion performance is executed during the ready-to-win performance period, which is the second half of the variable display of super ready-to-win, so that it is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the setting suggesting effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect which is the latter half of the variable display of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the setting suggesting effect is executed in the first half of the variable display of super reach.

9-18 and 9-22, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a pending display forewarning effect that can display the display mode of the pending memory display as a pre-reading notice in a white square or star shape, a blue or red camera mode, or the like. It is possible to determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the display flag value 1 or 2). Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display (the value of the reserved display flag is 3 or 4) which is the mode of the camera whose display mode is blue or red, the setting suggestion performance is executed when the player pays attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit, so that the player can be prevented from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-29 and 9-31, when the pending display advance notice effect is executed, the setting suggesting effect can be executed in the variable display (variable display immediately after the pending display notice effect is ended) corresponding to the pending storage display which is the target of the pending display advance notice effect. Therefore, the setting suggestion performance is executed when the player pays attention to the variable display corresponding to the holding storage display which is the object of the holding display advance notice performance, so that the player can be prevented from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a form in which the pending display notice effect can be executed as the pre-reading notice is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Furthermore, the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the setting suggesting effect can be executed in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display which is the target of the reserved display notice effect (the variable display immediately after the reserved display notice effect is ended), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed during the execution period of the reserved display notice effect (that is, the timing before the start of the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display which is the target of the reserved display notice effect).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-19, the ratio of displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the pre-reading advance notice effect is set lower than the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display in the form of a white square or star as the pre-reading advance notice effect. Therefore, by displaying the reserved memory display in the form of a blue or red camera, it is possible to draw the player's attention more than when the reserved memory display is displayed in the form of a white square or star, thereby further preventing the player from overlooking the setting suggesting effect.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display in the blue or red camera mode as the pre-reading notice effect is set lower than the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display in the white square or star shape as the pre-reading notice effect. Alternatively, the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display in blue or red camera mode as the pre-reading notice effect and the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display in white squares or stars as the pre-reading notice effect may be the same.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, thereby prompting the player to prepare for photographing the setting suggesting effect. Therefore, the player can prepare a form terminal such as a smart phone before the setting suggesting effect is started, so that the success rate of the player's photographing of the setting suggesting effect can be increased.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is urged to prepare for shooting the setting suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The player may be prompted to prepare for filming the effect.

Further, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the pending display announcement effect can be executed with the display pattern γ that displays the pending memory display in the blue camera mode and the display pattern δ that displays the pending memory display in the red camera mode, and as shown in FIG. ) differ in the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect is executed. In particular, when the reserved memory display is displayed in the red camera mode, setting suggestion performance is executed at a higher rate than when the reserved memory display is displayed in the blue camera mode, so that when the reserved memory display is displayed in the red camera mode, the player can pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed than in the case where the reserved memory display is displayed in the blue camera mode, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the reserved memory display is displayed in blue or red camera mode, the display mode of the reserved memory display does not change until the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display starts. A case may be provided in which the display mode of the active display is changed from the blue camera mode to the red camera mode. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed until the variable display is finished, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-20, the suggesting effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggesting effect can be executed only in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern with a long special figure variation time, and is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach variation pattern with a short special figure variation time.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-28, the execution period of the setting suggestion performance is set to 7 seconds longer than the special figure variation time of the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach, so that the player can be further prevented from overlooking the setting suggestion performance during the variable display of the super reach (during execution of the reach performance).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-19 , when the reserved memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, it suggests that the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display is a variable display of super reach capable of executing the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, by displaying the reserved memory display in the blue or red camera form, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the setting suggestion effect is executed or not, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-19, when the variable category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than super reach, the pending memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect. It is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered without execution of the setting suggesting performance due to the occurrence.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-20 to 9-28, during the variable display of super reach, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display including the timer effect, but since the timer effect is not executed during the variable display of the non-reach and normal reach whose special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the variable display of the super reach, it is possible that the timer effect is executed during the variable display of the non-reach and the normal reach, in which the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestive effect is not executed, causing an inconsistency in the effect. can be prevented.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention.

For example, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-26(D), when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, the expectation for the big win is set higher than when the character effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and the setting suggestion effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable rear display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 9-32 as a modified example 153SG-1, the ratio of determining the execution of the timer effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is set lower than the ratio of determining the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the set suggestive effect may be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case where the character effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as the pre-reading notice, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U of the image display device 5 in the form of a white square, star, blue or red camera. As shown in FIG. 9-33(B), when the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U and the predetermined effect image 153SG005E overlaps the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U in the image display device 5, at least the reserved memory display in the form of a blue or red camera is displayed. It may be displayed with priority over the effect image 153SG005E (the reserved memory display in the blue or red camera mode may be displayed so as not to be hidden by the effect image 153SG005E). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the reserved memory display of the blue or red camera mode due to the effect image 153SG005E blocking the reserved memory display of the blue or red camera mode.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a configuration in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of the super reach has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 153SG-3, as shown in FIGS. Furthermore, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, a period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-34 (C), the special figure fluctuation time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach 3.75 seconds to 3 seconds shorter than 5.75 seconds).

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-22(A), as the holding display forewarning effect, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different between the case where the holding memory display is displayed in the blue camera mode and the case where the red camera mode is displayed. At least one effect pattern may be determined at different ratios. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to which of the mode of the blue camera or the mode of the red camera the suspension storage display is displayed as the suspension display advance notice performance, so that the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of variable display) are provided as the start timing of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the variable display of super reach, and the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display when the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is executed at a later timing. In the case of 30 seconds later, the setting suggesting performance may be executed in a performance pattern suggesting a high set value such as patterns SS-3 to SS-5 at a higher rate than in the case of setting the timing of starting the setting suggesting performance 25 seconds after the start of the variable display. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a form is exemplified which suggests whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed according to the effect executed as the suggesting effect during the front variable display and the display mode of the pending memory display displayed as the pending display forewarning effect. You may In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a configuration in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed as the rear part variable display suggestive effect during the variable display in which the timer effect as the front part variable display suggestive effect is executed was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, when the suspension display forewarning effect is already executed, the execution of the new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted. For example, when the pending display forewarning effect has already been executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (when the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode), only execution of a new pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern α or the display pattern β (the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape) is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of pending display forewarning effects with different suggested contents. Furthermore, when the pending display advance notice performance is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, by restricting the execution of the new pending display notice performance in the display pattern α or the display pattern β, the player can be made to pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed. In addition, when the pending display forewarning effect has already been executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β (when the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape), by restricting only execution of the new pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode), the player can be made to pay more attention to whether the variable display result becomes a big hit or not.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which the pending display notice effect can be executed as the prefetch effect in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as the prefetch effect, any effect other than the hold display notice effect may be executed as long as it is executable from the timing before the target variable display starts.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the character effect and the timer effect can be executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display indicating that the variable display result will be a big hit was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 092IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 092IW will be described. In this characteristic part 092IW, it is possible to execute a big win suggesting performance suggesting that the variable display result of the variable display will be a big win, and a preparation performance for notifying that the big win suggesting performance will be executed before the big win suggesting performance is executed. Incidentally, the big win suggesting performance whose execution is announced by the preparation performance may be either a look-ahead foretelling performance for foretelling the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended) or a foretelling performance for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution. In this characterizing section 092IW, as the jackpot suggesting effects, it is possible to execute a pending display forewarning effect, a timer effect, and a chance eye forewarning effect. In addition, as preparation performances for notifying that the big win suggesting performance is executed before the big win suggesting performance is executed, a reservation display advance notice preparation performance for notifying that the reservation display foretelling performance will be executed before the reservation display foretelling performance is executed, and a timer preparation performance for notifying that the timer performance will be executed before the timer performance is executed can be executed.

FIG. 10-1 is a part of the flow chart of the effect control process (step S76) in this characterizing part 092IW. In the effect control process processing in this characteristic part 092IW, after executing the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) in which determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG.

FIG. 10-2 is a flow chart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 10-1.

In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a new command for one set of starting winnings has been received (step 092IWS001). Specifically, it is checked whether or not one set of start winning designation command, pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and pending memory number notification command is newly stored in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning. In this example, in the command analysis process (step S75), when the command at the time of starting winning is received, the received command at the time of starting winning is stored in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning provided in RAM122. In this example, since the upper limit of the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories is 4, the reception command buffer at the time of start winning has four storage areas corresponding to the first reserved memories and the second reserved memories, respectively. If the command for one set of start winning has not been newly received, the process is terminated as it is.

When one set of starting winning command is newly received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed (step 092IWS001). If the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed, the process is terminated as it is (that is, no new pre-reading notice effect is executed).

If the pre-reading advance notice effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of pending memories is 2 or more (step 092IWS002). If the number of pending memories is not 2 or more, the process is terminated as it is (that is, no new pre-reading announcement effect is executed). It should be noted that whether or not the number of reserved memories is two or more can be determined, for example, by confirming the number of reserved memories notification command received from the game control microcomputer 100 .

When the pending storage number is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display notice effect and the effect mode in the case of execution (step 092IWS003).

The pending display notice performance is a performance suggesting that the display result of the corresponding variable display will be a big win by changing the display mode of the pending memory display (and the active display) to a display mode different from the normal mode. In this characteristic part 092IW, the pattern of changing the display mode at the time of being displayed as the pending memory display is shown as the pending display notice effect, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and a pattern of displaying in the normal mode when being displayed as the pending memory display and changing the display mode when being displayed as the active display may be included. That is, it may be possible to execute the pending display announcement effect that changes the display mode of the pending memory display or the active display at an arbitrary timing from the start winning point to the end of the target variable display. Similarly, the suspension display advance notice preparation effect for notifying that the suspension display notice effect will be executed may be configured to be executable at an arbitrary timing from the start winning point to the end of the target variable display. Also, the display mode of the pending memory display or the active display may be configured to change multiple times. In the case of such a configuration, it may be possible to execute the suspension display announcement preparation effect corresponding to each suspension display announcement effect.

FIG. 10-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pending display notice effect determination table. In step 092IWS003, a random number for determination of effect is extracted, and a pending display notice effect determination table is referred to, and based on whether the newly received command (symbol designation command and variable category command) at the time of start winning corresponds to "non-reach loss", "super reach loss", "jackpot other than jackpot A" and "jackpot A", the pending display notice effect is "not executed, held memory display: normal mode (white)", "executed". One of the following is determined: "Reserved memory display: first effect mode (blue)", "executed, reserved memory display: second effect mode (green)", and "executed, reserved memory display: third effect mode (red)".

In the pending display notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 10-3(A), a determination value corresponding to a random number for determination of effect is assigned for each winning determination result, but for the sake of simplification of explanation, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown. In other words, for each prize-winning determination result, the ratio of whether the pending display notice effect is determined to be any one of “no execution, pending memory display: normal mode (white)”, “executed, pending memory display: first effect mode (blue)”, “executed, pending memory display: second effect mode (green)”, and “executed, pending memory display: third effect mode (red)” is shown. In this example, in addition to the pending display notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 10-3(A), the pending display notice preparation effect determination table shown in FIG. 10-3(B), the timer effect determination table shown in FIG. 10-4(A), the timer preparation effect determination table shown in FIG. 10-4(B), and the chance eye preview effect determination table shown in FIG.

Features of the pending display notice effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-3(A), in the pending display notice effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big win", compared with the case of "losing", the decision value is assigned such that the percentage of the pending display notice effect determined to be "executed" is higher than "not executed". In addition, in the pending display notice effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big win", the determination value is assigned such that the ratio of "executed pending memory display: third effect mode (red)" is higher than "executed pending memory display: first effect mode (blue)" than "executed pending memory display: second effect mode (green)" and "executed pending memory display: second effect mode (green)" than "executed pending memory display: third effect mode (red)". With such a configuration, when the reserved display forewarning performance is executed, furthermore, when the performance is executed in the second performance mode (green) rather than the first performance mode (blue) and in the third performance mode (red) rather than the second performance mode (green), it is suggested that a big hit will be achieved. That is, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of third rendering mode (red)>second rendering mode (green)>first rendering mode (blue)>no execution.

When it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect in step S092IWS003 (N of step S092IWS004), the process proceeds to step S092IWS008, and when it is decided to execute (Y of step S092IWS004), the effect control CPU 120 sets a pending display notice effect flag indicating that it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect (step S092IWS005).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the pending display notice preparation effect (step S092IWS006). The pending display advance notice preparation effect is one of the preparation effects, and foretells that the pending display advance notice effect will be executed before the pending display advance notice effect is executed.

FIG. 10-3(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table. At step 092IWS006, a random number for determination of performance is extracted, a pending display advance notice preparation performance determination table is referred to, and one of ``no execution'', ``first performance mode with execution (small effect)'', and ``second performance mode with execution (large effect)'' is determined for the suspension display advance notice preparation performance based on the performance mode of the suspension display previous notice performance.

Features of the pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-3(B), in the pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table, determination values are assigned so that the higher the degree of expectation of the effect mode of the pending display notice preparation effect for a big win, the higher the percentage of the pending display advance notice preparation effect determined to be "executed" rather than "not executed". In addition, in the pending display advance notice preparation performance determination table, determination values are assigned so that the higher the performance mode of the pending display notice performance is expected to be a big win, the higher the ratio of the determination of the ``second performance mode with execution (large effect)'' to the ``first performance mode with execution (small effect)''. With such a configuration, when the holding display advance notice preparation performance is executed, and furthermore, when it is executed in the second performance mode (large effect) rather than the first performance mode (small effect), it is suggested that a big win will be achieved. That is, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of second presentation mode (large effect)>first presentation mode (small effect)>no execution.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the reserved storage number is 3 or more (step 092IWS007). If the reserved storage number is not equal to or greater than 3, the process ends. It should be noted that whether or not the number of pending memories is 3 or more can be determined, for example, by confirming the pending memory number notification command received from the game control microcomputer 100 .

When the number of pending memories is 3 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the timer effect and the effect mode in the case of execution (step 092IWS008).

The timer effect is a effect suggesting a period from the start timing of the target variable display to the start of execution of the specific effect (for example, the effect suggesting during the rear variable display in the characteristic part 153SG) as well as suggesting that the result of the variable display will be a big hit.

In this characteristic part 092IW, the timer effect is executed during the target variable display, so for example, it is realized by setting the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect in the variable display start setting process (S171) of the variable display determined to execute the timer effect, and executing various effect controls based on the effect control pattern in the variable display effect process (S172)).

It should be noted that, not limited to the configuration of this characteristic part 092IW, for example, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute a timer preparation effect, which will be described later, and the effect mode in the case of execution, without determining whether or not to execute the timer effect at the time of starting winning, and to determine whether or not to execute the timer effect when the target variable display is started. Further, in this case, whether or not to execute the timer effect and the effect mode in the case of execution may be determined at different ratios according to whether or not the timer preparation effect is to be executed and the effect mode.

Further, for example, the timer performance may be started during the variable display executed before the target variable display, or may be started at a timing after a predetermined period has passed since the target variable display is started. That is, the timer effect may be started at an arbitrary timing from the timing of starting winning to the end of the target variable display. Similarly, the timer preparation performance for notifying that the timer performance will be executed may be started at an arbitrary timing from the timing of starting prize winning to the end of the target variable display (however, until the timing at which the execution period of the timer performance can be secured).

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer effect determination table. In step 092 IWS008, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, and the timer effect determination table is referred to. Based on whether the newly received command (symbol designation command and variable category command) at the time of starting winning corresponds to "non-super reach", "super reach loss", or "super reach jackpot", the timer effect is set to "no execution", "first effect mode with execution (25 seconds)", or "second effect mode with execution (30 seconds)". Decide on one.

Features of the timer effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-4(A), in the timer effect determination table, the determination values are assigned so that when the winning determination result is a "big hit", the ratio of timer effect determined to be "executed" is higher than "not executed" compared to the case of "lose". In addition, in the timer performance determination table, when the determination result at the time of winning is ``big hit'', the determination value is assigned so that the ratio of determination to ``second performance mode with execution (30 seconds)'' is higher than that of ``first performance mode with execution (25 seconds)'' compared to the case of ``losing''. With such a configuration, when the timer performance is executed, and furthermore, when the second performance mode (30 seconds) is executed rather than the first performance mode (25 seconds), it is suggested that a big win is achieved. That is, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of second presentation mode (30 seconds)>first presentation mode (25 seconds)>no execution.

When it is determined not to execute the timer effect in step S092IWS008 (N of step S092IWS009), the process proceeds to step S092IWS012, and when it is determined to be executed (Y of step S092IWS009), the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer effect flag indicating that the timer effect is determined to be executed (step S092IWS010).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the timer preparation effect (step S092IWS011). The timer preparation effect is one of the preparation effects, and foretells that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed.

FIG. 10-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer preparation effect determination table. At step 092IWS006, a random number for determination of performance is extracted, a timer preparation performance determination table is referred to, and one of "no execution", "first performance mode with execution (small effect)" and "second performance mode with execution (large effect)" is determined for the timer preparation performance based on the performance mode of the timer performance.

Features of the timer preparation effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-4(B), in the timer preparation effect determination table, determination values are assigned such that the higher the degree of expectation of the timer effect effect for a big hit, the higher the ratio of determination of "executed" to "non-executed" for the timer preparation effect. In addition, in the timer preparation performance determination table, determination values are assigned so that the rate of determination of ``second performance mode with execution (character B)'' is higher than that of ``first performance mode with execution (character A)'' as the performance mode of the timer performance has a high expectation of winning a big hit. With such a configuration, when the timer preparation performance is executed, and furthermore, when it is executed in the second performance mode (character B) rather than the first performance mode (character A), it is suggested that a big win is achieved. That is, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of second effect mode (character B)>first effect mode (character A)>no execution.

This characterizing portion 092IW is configured such that the effect mode of the executable jackpot suggestive effect is different depending on which effect mode of the preparation effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-3(B), when the holding display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the holding display advance notice effect is executed in one of the first to third effect modes, and when the holding display advance notice preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed, the holding display advance notice effect is executed in one of the second to third effect modes. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), when the timer preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the timer effect is executed by one of the first to second effect modes, and when the timer effect of the second effect mode is executed, the timer effect is executed by the second effect mode. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied according to the performance mode of the preparation performance, and the degree of expectation when executed in combination with other preparation performance or big hit suggesting performance can be suitably adjusted for each performance mode of the preparation performance (that is, each degree of expectation).

Also, in this characterizing portion 092IW, the big hit suggestion effect is configured to be executable without executing the corresponding preparation effect. Specifically, when it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect or a timer effect, it may be determined not to execute a pending display notice preparation effect or a timer preparation effect (see FIGS. 10-3 (B) and 10-4 (B)). And it is configured such that the easiness of execution differs depending on whether or not an uncorresponding preparation effect has been executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-3, when the result of determination at the time of winning is a big hit, it is likely to be determined to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-4, it is likely to be decided to execute the timer effect. However, it may be decided not to execute the timer preparation effect. Then, when the pending display advance notice preparation effect not corresponding to the timer effect is executed, the timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is not executed. With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

In this characterizing part 092IW, when the preparation performance is executed, the corresponding big win suggestion performance is always executed, but for example, as the preparation performance, the normal preparation performance in which the corresponding big win suggestion performance is executed after the performance and the false preparation performance in which the corresponding big win suggestion performance is not executed after the performance may be executable. In this case, when the false reservation display advance notice preparation performance is executed, the timer performance (which may or may not be accompanied by the timer preparation performance) may be executed at a higher rate than when the false reservation display advance notice preparation performance is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is false, and it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

Further, in this characteristic portion 092IW, the proportion of which performance mode of the jackpot suggestive effect is executed differs depending on whether or not the preparation effect is executed. Specifically, when the performance mode of the pending display advance notice effect and the timer preparation effect is determined to be the second effect mode, compared with the case of determining the first effect mode, the rate of deciding to execute the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect is higher (see FIGS. 10-3 (B) and 10-4 (B)). With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance eye announcement effect (step 092IWS012).

The chance eye advance notice performance is a performance suggesting that the variable display result of the target variable display (or one of the variable displays retained and stored without specifying the target variable display) will be a big hit by deriving and displaying the chance eye pattern (in this example, a combination of decoration patterns of ``123'') as the display result of the variable display executed before the target variable display.

FIG. 10-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance eye announcement effect determination table. In step 092 IWS012, a random number for determination of performance is extracted, a chance prediction performance determination table is referenced, and the chance prediction performance is determined to be either ``no execution'' or ``with execution'' based on which of ``non-super reach'', ``super reach loss'', ``jackpot other than jackpot A'' and ``jackpot A'' corresponds to the newly received command (symbol designation command and variable category command) at the time of start winning.

The feature of the chance eye announcement effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-5(A), in the chance notice effect determination table, when the result of judgment at the time of winning is "big hit", the judgment value is assigned so that the ratio of determination of "executed" to "not executed" for the chance notice effect is higher than in the case of "lose". With such a configuration, it is suggested that there will be a big hit when the chance's foretelling effect is executed.

This characteristic part 092IW is configured to be able to execute a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, and a chance notice effect as the jackpot suggestion effects, but as shown in FIGS. There is a small difference in the execution ratio between when you win and when you lose. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win is lower in the chance-eye forewarning effect than in the pending display forewarning effect and the timer effect.

When it is decided not to execute the chance prediction effect in step S092IWS012 (N of step S092IWS013), the process proceeds to step S092IWS015, and when it is decided to execute it (Y of step S092IWS013), the effect control CPU 120 sets a chance prediction effect flag indicating that it is decided to execute the chance prediction effect (step S092IWS014).

Next, when the pending display notice effect flag is set (step S092IWS015: Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays a new pending memory display according to the decision of the pending display notice preparation effect (step S092IWS016).

In step S092IWS016, for example, if it is determined to execute the pending display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a new pending memory display in the normal mode, and displays a small effect image (see, for example, the small effect image 092IW004b in FIG. 10-11 (B1)) near the pending memory display. Also, when it is decided to execute the pending display advance notice preparation effect of the second effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a new pending memory display in the normal mode, and displays a large effect image (see, for example, the large effect image 092IW004b in FIG. 10-11 (A1)) near the pending memory display.

Next, if the timer effect flag is not set (N of step S092IWS017), the effect control CPU 120 ends the processing as it is, and if the timer effect flag is set (Y of step S092IWS017), it confirms whether or not the pending display advance notice preparation effect is the first effect mode (step S092IWS018). Then, when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is the first effect mode (Y in step S092IWS018), effect control CPU 120 executes a timer preparation effect (step S092IWS019). After that, the process ends.

In step S092IWS019 (and step S092IWS022 to be described later), for example, when it is decided to execute the timer preparation effect of the first effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a character A image (for example, see the image 092IW005 of character A in FIG. 10-10(E)) for notifying that the timer effect will be executed. Further, when it is decided to execute the timer preparation effect of the second effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a character B image for notifying that the timer effect will be executed.

When the pending display notice effect flag is not set in step S092IWS015 (N of step S092IWS015), effect control CPU 120 displays a new pending storage display in a normal mode (step S092IWS020).

Next, when the timer effect flag is not set (N of step S092IWS021), the effect control CPU 120 ends the processing as it is, and when the timer effect flag is set (Y of step S092IWS021), the timer preparation effect is executed (step S092IWS022). After that, the process ends.

FIG. 10-6 is a flow chart showing a pre-reading notice execution process (step 092IWS161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 10-1.

In the pre-reading notice execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the pending display notice effect flag is set (step 092IWS102) when it is time to shift the reserved storage (Y in step 092IWS101).

When the pending display notice effect flag is set (Y in step 092IWS102), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the pending display notice preparation effect is being executed (step 092IWS103).

When the pending display notice preparation effect is being executed (Y in step 092IWS103), the effect control CPU 120 ends the pending display notice preparation effect and executes the pending display notice preparation effect (step 092IWS104).

Next, when the timer effect flag is set (Y of step 092IWS105), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the timer preparation effect is being executed (step 092IWS106).

When the timer preparation effect is not being executed (N of step 092IWS103), the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer preparation effect (step 092IWS107).

Next, execution timings of the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect, and the timer effect and the timer preparation effect will be described. FIG. 10-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the pending display notice effect (preparation effect) and the timer effect (preparation effect).

FIG. 10-7(A) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the suspension display notice effect and the suspension display notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. In this case, the pending display notice preparation effect is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the prefetching notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-2), and the holding display notice preparation effect is completed at the shift timing of the hold storage and the holding display notice preparation effect is executed (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the prefetching notice execution process shown in FIG. 10-6). .

FIG. 10-7(B) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the timer effect and the timer advance notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. In this case, the timer preparation effect is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS021 to 092IWS022 of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-2), the timer preparation effect is completed at the start timing of the target variable display, and the timer effect is started (for example, the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set in the variable display start setting process (S171), and the output control pattern is set in the variable display effect process (S172). It is realized by executing various production control based on).

FIG. 10-7(C) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect and a pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) and a timer effect and a timer notice preparation effect at the start winning. In this case, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is started at the timing of the start winning (e.g., corresponding to steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the prefetching notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-2), and the timer preparation effect is started (for example, corresponding to steps 092IWS018 to 092IWS019 of the prefetching notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-2). Then, at the shift timing of the pending memory, the pending display notice preparation effect is finished and the pending display notice effect is executed (for example, corresponding to steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 10-6). After that, at the start timing of the target variable display, the timer preparation effect is finished and the timer effect is started (for example, by setting the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect in the variable display start setting process (S171) and executing various effect controls based on the output control pattern in the effect process during the variable display (S172)).

FIG. 10-7(D) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect and a pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and a timer effect and a timer notice preparation effect at the start winning. In this case, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, it corresponds to the processing of steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the prefetching notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-2), but the timer preparation effect is not started (for example, it corresponds to the processing of step 092IWS018 of the prefetching notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-2). Then, when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is completed at the shift timing of the hold storage and the pending display notice preparation effect is executed (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the prefetching notice execution processing shown in FIG. 10-6), the timer preparation effect is started (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS105 to 092IWS107 of the prefetching notice execution processing shown in FIG. 10-6). After that, at the start timing of the target variable display, the timer preparation effect is finished and the timer effect is started (for example, by setting the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect in the variable display start setting process (S171) and executing various effect controls based on the output control pattern in the effect process during the variable display (S172)).

Next, a description will be given of the effects of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect. FIG. 10-8 is an explanatory diagram showing the effects of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect.

FIG. 10-8 shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect and a pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and a timer effect and a timer notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning, and corresponds to the example of FIG. 10-7 (D).

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 (A) and (B), a new starting prize occurs during the variable display, and based on the starting prize, when execution of the pending display advance notice effect and the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer effect and timer advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is determined, a new pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 092IW001 and the second pending memory display area 092IW002 in the normal mode. At this time, the suspension display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is started, and a lightning bolt-shaped image 092IW004a with a large effect is displayed in the vicinity of the new suspension memory display. Note that the timer advance notice preparation effect is restricted from being executed simultaneously with the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode), so it is not executed at this timing.

Then, as shown in Fig. 10-8 (C) to FIG. 10-8 (D), when the variable display is terminated, a shift in holding memory is performed, and a new variable display is started, the preparation for the suspension display notice (for example, the lightning -type effect of the images 092IW004a is stored. A display control that appears by acting on the memory display is performed), and a suspension display notification (3rd direction) is executed in which the display form of the holding memory is changed to red. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8(E), a timer preparation effect (first effect mode) is started, and an image 092IW005 of character A for notifying that the timer effect will be executed is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 10-8(F) to 10-8(G), when a new variable display to be the target of the timer effect is started, the timer preparation effect (first effect mode) ends expansively, and the timer effect (first effect mode) for updating the timer for 25 seconds, which is the period until the specific effect during the variable display, is started.

This characterizing portion 092IW is configured to be able to execute a pending display notice effect and a timer effect as a jackpot suggesting effect suggesting that the variable display result of the variable display will result in a big win. In addition, a reservation display advance notice preparation performance for notifying that the reservation display notice performance will be executed before the reservation display notice performance is executed, and a timer preparation performance for notifying that the timer performance will be executed before the timer performance is executed are executable as preparation performances.

Such a preparatory performance has a function of drawing attention to the big-win suggesting performance executed after the preparatory performance, but when a plurality of preparatory performances are simultaneously executed, the player's expectations are too high, and as a result, there is a possibility that the player's interest is greatly reduced when the big win is not achieved. Therefore, in this characterizing portion 092IW, simultaneous execution of a plurality of preparation effects is restricted. Specifically, the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect have different execution periods and are configured not to be executed at the same time (in this example, the timer preparation effect is executed after the execution of the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is completed. See FIG. 10-7(D)). With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

In the configuration of the characteristic part 092IW, the execution periods of the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are configured so as not to overlap at all.

In addition, in the configuration of the characteristic part 092IW, the pending display advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) having a lower expectation level than the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is configured to be executable simultaneously with the timer preparation effect. Also, a plurality of preparation effects may not always be executed at the same time.

Further, for example, only when the performance mode of the reservation display advance notice preparation performance is the first performance mode with lower expectation than the second performance mode and the performance mode of the timer preparation performance is the first performance mode with lower expectation than the second performance mode, they may be simultaneously executed.

Further, for example, when a plurality of preparation performances are executed simultaneously (or when a plurality of preparation performances are simultaneously executed in a second performance mode with a high degree of expectation), a big win may be determined.

In addition, in the configuration of this characteristic portion 092IW, a pattern is shown in which the display mode of the reserved memory display (and active display) changes once, but if a pattern is provided in which the display mode of the reserved memory display (and active display) changes multiple times, when the reserved memory display (or active display) is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode (specifically, a display mode with a higher degree of expectation), the display mode of the reserved memory display (or active display) will change. (or active display), and if the arrow pierces the reserved memory display (or active display), it changes, and if it does not pierce, it does not change.

Next, a description will be given of the processing for executing the chance prediction effect. FIG. 10-9 is a flow chart showing an example of the chance prediction setting process. The chance eye advance notice setting process is executed as part of the variable display start setting process (step S171) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 10-1.

In the chance prediction setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the chance prediction effect flag is set (step 092IWS201). If the chance prediction effect flag is set, the decision table is used to determine whether or not the chance prediction effect is to be executed (step 092, IWS 202).

FIG. 10-10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance prediction execution propriety determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-10, when neither the pending display notice preparation effect nor the timer preparation effect is being executed, it is determined to be “executable” (that is, the execution of the chance notice effect is permitted) at a rate of 100%. In addition, when either the reserved display advance notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is being executed in the second effect mode, it is determined to be "executable" (that is, the execution of the chance advance notice effect is permitted) at a rate of 20%, and is decided to be "executable" (that is, the execution of the chance advance notice effect is not permitted) at a rate of 80%. In addition, when either the reserved display advance notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is executed in the first effect mode (and neither of them is executed in the second effect mode), it is determined to be ``non-execution'' (that is, the execution of the chance eye advance notice effect is not permitted) at a rate of 100%.

If execution of the chance eye notice effect is permitted in step 092IWS202 (Y in step 092IWS203), the chance eye symbol (in this example, a combination of decoration symbols "123") is determined as the stop symbol of the decoration symbol (step 092IWS204). It should be noted that, before step 092IWS204, when the stop design of the decoration design has already been determined, the stop design of the decoration design is changed to the chance eye design.

Next, a description will be given of the effects of the pending display notice preparation effect and the chance eye notice effect. FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram showing the mode of presentation of the pending display notice preparation effect and the opportunity notice effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-11 (A1) and (A2), when the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is executed and the lightning bolt type large effect image 092IW004a is displayed in the vicinity of the pending memory display, the execution of the chance advance notice effect may be permitted, and when the execution is permitted, the chance symbol (in this example, a combination of decoration symbols "123") is displayed as the stop symbol of the decoration symbol. That is, the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the chance eye notice effect are executed simultaneously.

As shown in FIGS. 10-11 (B1) and (B2), when the pending display advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is executed and the small and large lightning bolt type effect image 092IW004b is displayed in the vicinity of the pending memory display, since the execution of the chance advance notice effect is not permitted, the stop pattern of the decorative pattern different from the chance eye pattern (a combination of the decorative patterns of "123" in this example) is displayed. That is, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) and the chance eye notice effect are not executed at the same time.

In this characteristic part 092IW, as a jackpot suggestion effect, a chance prediction effect can be executed separately from the pending display notice effect and the timer effect, and this chance chance notice effect is configured to be executed in the same period as the preparation effects such as the pending display notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect (that is, it is executed during the period before the target variable display is executed. See FIGS. 10-11 (A1) and (A2)). In addition, as described above, the degree of expectation for a big win is lower in the chance eye notice effect than in the pending display notice effect and the timer effect. Therefore, when the preparation performance is being executed (that is, before the big win suggesting performance is executed and the degree of expectation is unknown), if the chance prediction performance with a low expectation of the big win is executed, there is a possibility that the performance effect of the preparation performance is lowered. Moreover, there is a possibility that the suggested degree of expectation may become difficult to understand. Therefore, the present characterizing part 092IW is configured such that the second chance notice effect is more likely to be executed when the pending display notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is not executed than when it is executed (for example, see FIG. 10-10). With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

Further, this characterizing part 092IW is configured such that the easiness of execution of the chance notice performance is different between when the preparation performance of the first performance mode is executed and when the preparation performance of the second performance mode with higher expectations than the first performance mode is executed. Specifically, the chance notice effect is configured to be more likely to be permitted when the pending display notice preparation effect is executed in the second effect mode (large effect) than when it is executed in the first effect mode (small effect) (see FIG. 10-10). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest while securing an opportunity to execute the chance prediction effect.

As described above, the characteristic part 092IW includes a suggestion effect executing means capable of executing an advantageous suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.) that suggests control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state), and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the advantageous suggesting effect will be executed before the advantageous suggesting effect is executed, and the advantageous suggesting effect is the first suggesting effect (for example, and a second suggestion effect (e.g. timer effect) different from the first suggestion effect, the preparation effect includes a first preparation effect (e.g. pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggestion effect will be executed and a second preparation effect (e.g. timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect can be executed at the same time, and simultaneous execution of the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect is restricted ( For example, the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are not executed at the same time (see FIG. 10-7(D)). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, the present characteristic part 092IW is provided with a suggestion effect executing means capable of executing an advantageous suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.) suggesting that the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is controlled, and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the advantageous suggestive effect will be executed before the advantageous suggestive effect is executed, and the advantageous suggestive effect is the first suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect). and a second suggesting effect (e.g., timer effect) different from the first suggesting effect, and a third suggesting effect (e.g., second chance notice effect) different from the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect. can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 10-11 (A1) and (A2)), and the third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is being executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is being executed (see, for example, FIG. 10-10). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, the characteristic part 092IW is provided with a suggestion effect executing means capable of executing an advantageous suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.) suggesting that the advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) is controlled, and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the advantageous suggesting effect will be executed before the advantageous suggesting effect is executed. and a second suggestion effect (e.g., a timer effect) different from the first suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect includes a predetermined first suggestion effect and a special first suggestion effect with a higher degree of expectation than the predetermined first suggestion effect (including, for example, a first effect mode (blue) and a third effect mode (red)), and a preparation effect is a first preparation for notifying that the first suggestion effect will be executed. Effect (for example, pending display notice preparation effect) and a second preparation effect (for example, timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed. The first preparation effect has a first effect mode and a second effect mode in which the special first suggestive effect is more likely to be executed than the first effect mode (for example, there is a first effect mode (small effect) and a second effect mode (large effect), and when the second effect mode (large effect) is executed, the first preparation effect is performed. The pending display forewarning effect of the rendering mode (blue) is not executed, and the pending display forewarning effect of the third rendering mode (red) is likely to be executed (see FIG. 10-3(B)), the execution ratio of the second preparation effect differs between when the first preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed and when the first preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed (for example, the timer preparation effect is executed at the same time when the pending display notice preparation effect of the first effect mode (small effect) is being executed, but the second effect mode (large effect) 10-7). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, the characteristic part 092IW is provided with a suggestion effect executing means capable of executing an advantageous suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.) suggesting that the advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) is controlled, and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the advantageous suggesting effect will be executed before the advantageous suggesting effect is executed. a second suggestion effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggestion effect (for example, a timer effect); and a third suggestion effect (for example, a chance preview effect) different from the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect (for example, a second suggestion effect). The preparation effect includes a first preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggestion effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect (for example, a timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed. There is a production mode and a second production mode in which a special first suggestive production is more likely to be executed than the first production mode (for example, there is a first production mode (small effect) and a second production mode (large effect), and when the second production mode (large effect) is executed, the first production mode (blue) is not executed, and the third production mode (red) is likely to be executed. First preparation production of the first production mode. is executed and when the first preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed, the execution ratio of the third suggestion effect is different (for example, execution of the second chance preview effect is more likely to be permitted when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is executed in the second effect mode (large effect) than when it is executed in the first effect mode (small effect). See FIG. 10-10). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, the period of execution differs between the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect (for example, the timer preparation effect is executed after the execution of the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is completed. See FIG. 10-7(D)). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, the first suggestive effect is executed in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, first effect mode (blue), second effect mode (green), third effect mode (red), etc.; see FIG. 10-3(A)), and the first preparation effect is executed in any of a plurality of types of effect modes (e.g., first effect mode (small effect), second effect mode (large effect, etc.; see FIG. 10-3(B)). Depending on whether or not the first preparation performance of the performance mode is executed, the performance mode of the first suggestive performance that can be executed is different (for example, when the suspension display advance notice preparation performance of the first performance mode is executed, the suspension display notice performance is executed by one of the first to third performance modes, and when the suspension display notice preparation performance of the second performance mode is executed, the suspension display notice performance is executed by one of the second to third performance modes). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, the advantageous suggestive effect can be executed without executing the corresponding preparation effect (for example, when it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect or the timer effect, it may be determined that the pending display notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is not executed. See FIGS. In the case of winning, it is easy to decide to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect.In addition, as shown in Fig. 10-4, it is easy to decide to execute the timer effect.However, it may be decided not to execute the timer preparation effect.Then, when the pending display notice preparation effect not corresponding to the timer effect is executed, the timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the pending display notice preparation effect is not executed.) Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 092IW, the ratio of which effect suggesting effect is executed differs depending on whether or not the preparation effect is executed (for example, when the effect mode of the pending display advance notice effect and the timer preparation effect is determined as the second effect mode, the ratio of determining to execute the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect is higher than when the first effect mode is determined. See FIGS. 10-3 (B) and 10-4 (B)). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

It should be noted that the configuration indicated by the characterizing portion 092IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration indicated by other characterizing portions such as the characterizing portion 153SG to form a gaming machine. For example, the timer preparation performance indicated by the characterizing part 092IW may predict that a timer performance suggesting a period until the start of execution of the suggesting performance during the rear variable display indicated by the feature part 153SG is suggested to be a big hit, and the timer performance may be made capable of executing a jackpot suggesting performance suggesting a big hit as a suggesting performance during the rear variable display during the ready-to-win performance or a setting suggesting performance suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state;
a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed;
with
The suggestive effect includes a first suggestive effect, a second suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect, and a third suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect,
The preparation effect includes a first preparation effect for notifying that the first suggestive effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed,
The third suggestive effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel in the same period and independently of each other,
The third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed,
The preparation effect executing means can execute the second preparation effect over a plurality of variable displays.
A gaming machine characterized by: